Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2003-R0265 - Contract For Police And Municipal Court Renovation - Sandia Construction, Inc. - 07_10_2003
Resolution No. 2003—RO265 July 10, 2003 Item No. 39 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract per ITB 4081- 03/RS for the Police Department and Municipal Courts renovation, by and between the City of Lubbock and Sandia Construction, Inc. of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 10th da ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilman, urchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Knighsistant City Attorney gs/ccdocs/contract-ITB-Sandia Const-Bid#081-03RS.res June 27, 2003 U 3ABY t313i�S CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLICE DEPARTMENT 4 11UNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION IT #081-03/RS P1annea_ .�ro,gress exa5 L— ITS #081-03/RS, Addendum #1 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.tubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #1 ITB #081-03 / RS Police Department I* Municipal Courts Renovation MAILED TO VENDOR: June 5, 2003 CLOSE DATE: June 10, 2003 @ 2:00 p.m. .-� The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed Addendum #1 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper 2. Do you have a security hardware schedule? There is no security schedule for the door hardware. The A. City of Lubbock has a separate contract for security systems and installation and it will not be included in this project under the General Contractor. 3. Are the walnut doors to be split face, ie. oak one side walnut other side? All Walnut doors are to be Walnut on both faces of the door. All doors including walnut face doors are flush panel. 4. Do you have a size (w x h) for the HM-1 borrowed lites? All power associated with security systems at doors shall be provided and installed by the security system contractor. At each door noted to have security hardware, the electrical contractor is to provide conduit from the door frame strike plate to above the ceiling for future wiring of security. devices. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806) 775-2164 or Email to rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUB OCK io Ron "uffiel Senior Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or ow any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. ow 081-03RSAdd 1 ADDENDUM NO.1 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: Municipal Square Phase IV Renovation DATE: June 4, 2003 PSC Job No: 03.8796.02 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Specifications. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated May 19, 2003 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 3 page(s), plus 2 attachment(s) consisting of 5 page(s) Specifications: Section 08000, DOOR SCHEDULE 1. All door types are shown as A. This is a flush panel door Section 08700, HARDWARE 1. Section 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE, HW-11, Delete door no. 115. �■ 2. Section 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE, HW-11, Delete door closer, silensers and door stop, and add the following: 1 set Weatherstripping 1 ea Threshold J32100 3. Section 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE, add the following hardware type: HW-20 Opening No's 115 Each opening to have: 6 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lockset D76RD 626 1 ea Flushbolts L04081 626 1 set weatherstipping 1 ea Threshold J32100 4. Section 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE, HW-10, change the Lockset designation to the following: D80RD. 5. Section 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE, HW-4; change the Lockset designation to the following: D72RD-XC11-767. PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 8e Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 ■ FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa P" Section 10210, LOUVERS 1. Add the attached specification section 10210 METAL WALL LOUVERS for the mechanical louver shown in option #1. Drawings: Sheet A-106 1. In room 273 there are two windows labeled HM1. These are rated 20 min 4'4' x 4'-0" hollow metal framed windows with 1/4 inch wire glass equal to GI in Section 08800 GLAZING. ^* Sheet A-301 1. Note 26 indicates to refer to structural for the footings. Delete note 26. A new footing detail is attached to this addenda. Sheet A-501, Detail B2: 1. The pre -cast terrazzo evidence drying chamber floor pan shall be equal to the following: .� Stem -Williams, Serpentine Model #34, 36" x 36" pan. The requirement for a clear dimension of 3'-0" for the inside of the evidence drying chamber shall be deleted. Sheet M-110 1. Delete the note referting to duct liner under the VAV BOX SCHEDULE. This duct shall be externally insulated as specified. Sheet M-111 1. Under HOOD EXHAUST and EVIDENCE DRYING BOOTH details, add the following: "All exhaust ducts shall be galvanized sheet metal as specified for low pressure duct." 2. The new 8' hood specified on this sheet shall be provided by the General Contractor and connected by the contractor under Division 15. Clarifications: A. The demolition notes for OPTION #1 indicate to remove the plaster ceilings over the new mechanical and storage buildings. It is not required that these be patched back over the mechanical or storage rooms. The exposed structure above is acceptable. The plaster will be required to be patched on the outside of these spaces to match the existing. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 85`' Street • Lubbock, Texas 79423 �•* (806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500 j Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa K" SECTION 10210 METAL WALL LOUVERS :fix,• M PART 1- GENERAL v" 14746 P' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. OR 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fixed louvers and frames. B. Insect Screening 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Prepared exterior wall opening. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting. .� D. Division 15 Section - Fans: Ductwork attachment to louver. E. Section 15714 - Filters: Filter attachment to louver. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AA - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. C. AAMA 606.1- Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for .� Architectural Aluminum. D. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. E. AAMA 608.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. AMCA 500 (Air Movement Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. .e, G. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. H. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 0M I. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars. J. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. K. ASTM A653/A653M - Sheet Steel, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality. L. ASTM A740 - Hardware Cloth (Woven or Welded Galvanized Steel Wire Fabric). M. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. �* N. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. O. FS RR-W-360A - Wire Fabric, Industrial P. FS RR-W-365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening). 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 1 06/03 / ADDENDA NO. 1 s*, P.M 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Fixed Louver Section 1. Installed louver to permit passage of air velocity as shown on mechanical drawings without blade vibration or noise, with maximum static pressure loss of 0.10 inches. 2. Fabricate louver to permit minimum 50 percent free area. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with three years experience. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate on shop drawings, layout, elevations, dimensions and tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screening; and frames. 2. Provide product data on preassembled louvers describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, free area, materials and finishes. 3. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 4. Submit operation and maintenance data including lubrication schedules and adjustment requirements. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with installation of unit masonry. B. Coordinate work of this Section with mechanical ductwork. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cesco Products, Minneapolis, MN. B. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.; Cincinnati, OH. C. Ruskin Manufacturing, Grandview, MO. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 6063-T5. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, galvanized to G90 zinc coating, factory primed for field painting. D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A283, galvanized to G60 zinc coating. E. Fasteners and Anchors: ASTM A307, galvanized steel type. F. Accessories 1. Linkage a. Concealed in jamb. 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 2 06/03 ADDENDA NO. 1 ., I 2. Operator a. Control circuit: 2 wire, 120 volt, 60 hertz. b. Return: Automatic spring powered upon power interruption. C. Case: Die cast aluminum, NEMA Type I. d. Operating environment: -40 to 136 degrees F. .a e. Accessories: Splined crank arm, linkage connector as required by conditions and dustproof cover. G. Insect Screening: 18 x 14 interwoven wire mesh of .009 inch diameter galvanized, 1/2 inch open weave, square design. H. Primer: Manufacturer's standard baked on type. I. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame. J. Sealants: Type specified in Section 07900. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Louver Size: 8 inches deep, face measurements as indicated or required to cover cavity between wythes of walls. B. Louver Blade Design: A. 1. Fixed Louver Section a. 18 gage galvanized sheet steel, sloped at 45 degrees; K-style; integral waterstops on blade. C. Louver Frame 1. General a. Channel shaped with welded comer joints. b. Fixed sections to mesh tightly to form rigid waterproof mullion with no exposed fasteners. 2. Fixed Louver Section: 18 gage galvanized steel. D. Sill Flashings: One piece per louver, roll formed to shape indicated on drawings or if not indicated as required in conformance with SMACNA 7-3 B. E. Screens: Permanently install screen mesh in shaped frame with reinforced comer construction; screw to louver frame. 2.4 FINISHES A. Exterior Steel Surfaces and Exterior Surface of Blank -Out Sheeting: Shop coat of primer for field painting. B. Interior Steel Surfaces, Screens and Blank -Out Sheeting: Shop coat of primer for field painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the louver manufacturer. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 3 06/03 ADDENDA NO. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Secure louvers in opening framing with exposed fasteners removable for future mechanical installation. D. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. E. Install insect screening to interior of louver. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement with actual control; lubricate operating joints. B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 4 ra* 06103 ADDENDA NO. 1 12 APOENOOM ,yo • 2�3 CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID Wolzi TITLE: POLICE DEPARTMENT & MUNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 081-03/RS PROJECT NUMBER: 90040.8304.20000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT 0% PM. INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT r" 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB #081-031RS k Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 10th day of June, 2003, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all plan holders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "POLICE DEPARTMENT & MUNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION" 0' After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 10th day of June, 2003, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 26th day of June, 2003, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been g thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on 29th day of May, 2003 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Planning Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, 4222 85th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, Phone: (806) 473-2200. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock ADA Coordinator at (806) 775-2018 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER ww GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDER a. .WA GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish POLICE DEPARTMENT & MUNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 10th day of June, 2003 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #081-03/RS, POLICE DEPARTMENT & MUNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and f address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 dM Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting Pak will be held at 10:00 a.m., May 29th, 2003 in Planning Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS r " 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information a ; supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. .r 1 t 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS r, 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all 4 requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations ., that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. Oft 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS " 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the 3 preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT p 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. ^' 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to -; release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from n. public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the ka:u event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent k jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc, that the bidder is or may ., be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. r► 2 ce 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. e, 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS i It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. "+ 12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. q RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER r " City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us ? 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within THREE HUNDRED "^ (300) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements 3 r+ contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. . 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP �• u The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects k appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and j warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be !"+ delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 00% 4 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a •'^ way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the ' Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of n the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use t utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. !�* 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. f ' 23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or ^�^ below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the ^^ work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 25 INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do A* business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City } ' and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also t' shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether 5 performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be on submitted before contract execution. 25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE !•* CITY OF LUBBOCK AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages •, included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector into be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately k < commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or fife. ,.., 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, �. not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the r work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which r,schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these ""'' contract documents. g 28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 29 PREPARATION FOR BID 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 29.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 29.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. 30 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. f (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. j (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). f. (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. . , If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 31 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 4." The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations e deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The bidder's bid may be Owl o7 rb x: K deemed not to meet specifications or the bid may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 32 BID AWARD 32.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole ' discretion. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to accept the Base Bid and Bid Options in any order or combination that serves its best interest. The low bid shall be determined on the price combination of the Total Base Bid and any accepted Bid Options. 32.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 32.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 32.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 32.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all n other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 32.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. AMR 0" 8 BID SUBMITTAL h 0 BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: June 10, 2003 PROJECT NUMBER: #081-03/RS -POLICE DEPARTMENT & MUNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION Bid of Sandia Construction, Inc. (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a POLICE DEPARTMENT & MUNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION having carefully examined the plans„specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. BASE BID: MATERIALS: SERVICES: PERSONS CRIMES AREA RENOVATIONS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN -.�! IN pz, " l /OEA TOTAL BASE BID: OPTION #1: MUNICIPAL COURTS AREA RENOVATIONS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN MATERIALS: SERVIC TOTAL OPTION #1 (ADD): !ULV_ OPTION #2: IDENTIFICATION kAEA— EAST PORTION REN 9VyA�TIONS' AS SPECIFIED HEREIN MATERIALS: f 1 ��1� ($ l5�/ ) SERVICES: TOTAL OPTION #2 (ADD):Ake n OPTION #3: IDENTIFICATION AREA— WEST PORTION RENOVATIONS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN MATERIAL; SERVICES: TOTAL OP A OPTION #4: MATERIAL SERVICES 2"D FLOOR MEETING ROOM RENOVATIONS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN TOTAL OPTION #4 (AL): (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written ""Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 300 (THREE HUNDRED) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in Lxcess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. L Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with nstruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the idding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days. Lfter the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the lelans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to ommence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on ,hich he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. 1,,, Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or artified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable ..ithout recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the �hid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all i ';cessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for liars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of Largest Amount Bid Dollars ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the ..;ent the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, r�surance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of r_eipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the ;dersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. (This Corporation has no seal) (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATT ST: Se retary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. One Date 6/5/03 Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Date: June 10, 2003 Authorized nature , Greg M. Durbin (Printed or Typed Name) Sandia Construction, Inc. Company 2723 81st Streit Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas 79423 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 745-9450 Fax: 806 745-9420 MIWBE Firm: Woman Black American Native American -d Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Other S eci n n 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. lw C LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS " linority Owned Yes No ❑ ❑ ❑ r CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. 0". (1- r Contract (Signature) Contractor Print) CONTRACTOR'S NAME: Sandia Construction, Inc. (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS:2723 81st Street Lubbock, TX 79423 Name of Agent/Broker: Gallagher Inwest Address of Agent/Broker: P. 0. Box 53910 City/State/Zip: Lubbock, Texas 79423 Agent/Broker Telephone Number: (806) 785-1988 Date:June 10, 2003 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, lease contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at 806 775-2165. h P 4 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST P.O. Box 85563, San Diego, CA 92186-5563 BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Sandia Construction, Inc. . (hereinafter called the Principal), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of California, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of Texas as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called the obligee) in the just and full sum of Five Percent of Greatest Amount Bid--------- Dollars ($-------- (5 %)--------- lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby ON bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. '" THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bound Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit to the obligee a bid or proposal dated June 10, 2003 for P" Police Department and Municipal Courts Renovations - Phase IV in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefor. .,A NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said. principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, neither Principal nor Surety shall be bound hereunder unless Obligee prior to execution of the final contract shall furnish evidence satisfactory to Principal and Surety that financing has been firmly committed to cover the entire cost of the project. Signed, sealed and dated: June 10, 2003 Principal Sandia Construction, Inc. by (Seal) �. SURAN E COMPA `! OF THWEST .. by Cara D. ancoc Attorney -in- act -w ICWTX 409 (06/92) FM P"M r= a— M" rw ram No. 0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized underth6 laws of the State of CaiiforriK Vie Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'), do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D.. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN,' "_... -..a. RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and'surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers ties l4ifi dif of 7anuary; 200 f �Oarµro� %NBugnLTY M0 ,���plfPOrG11FD,y* pQ?rQ�pF�gyrR'% � 4 �' s J SEAL C> MARtx 1, t� f� 9qi {per C� N 0 IOMA D 1`�� John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego SS. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST TIRE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig', personally known to meto be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same intheir authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. NORMAPORTER r. COMM. #1257540 _ NCTAUY PUBLIC-CALIFORNIA to SAN DINGO COiNV7Y 0 V e tAy Commission Expire MARCH 19, 2004 Witness my hand and official seal. Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign,' seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any'r'elated' documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment; may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such faosimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE L the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and 1ndepehden66 Casualty and Surety'Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 10th day of .Tune _ 2003 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-977-1111 and ask for the -'Surety Division. 'Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400. a— PERFORMANCE BOND i Bond No. 208 49 16 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) Sandia Construction, Inc. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Insurance Company of the West (hereinafter called the Suret (s), s Surety s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of 2; vP T ;n raq kh�6�T6g_thousand_--Dollars ($ 913, 500. 09 lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated thel Othday of July ,20 Otto Police Department and Municipal Courts Renovation and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and. made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be. determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 29th day of July , 20 03 .Insurance Compan ,''off the st Sandia Construction, Inc. Surety (Company Name) * By. Kevin J. Dunn, ttorney-In-Fact By; Greg.M. Durbin ( ted Name) Y (Sig ature President (Title) .* The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates Kevin J. Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Insurance Company of the West Surety (Title) Kevin J Dun , Attorney -In -Fact Approved as to Farm City of Lubbock A4) n 'E�' �i Ci ome * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety. Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. a A Oak, 2 0" id PM r ow P— No. 0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West; a Corporation duly orgamzed under'tlie laws of the State of Caltfornia, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and'indepen&- Casuai'ty a crSGgty Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'), do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN W rINESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. 4�C6YPANYO,i•� 1N8bq�1'Y bl��,pRPORAYEO ��, OQ���KVOyQf�'% � - aa' SEAL '+i4,71 t, 10 y John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego SS. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. ------------------- NORMA PO FiTC r COMM. #1257540 (A � NCTAPY PUBLIC-GA!_iFORNIA pk N °=O SAN Commission COUNTY h My Commission.Expire§ MARCH 1012004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) mined as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver oh behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE L the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 29th day of July 2003_. John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety -Division. Please refer to the power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, `TCW Group 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400. 0— STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Sandia Construction, Inc (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Insurance Companv of the West (hereinafter called the Sure (s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ne },un re h' thousand, dollars $913, 500.00 lawful money of the ve i�un re� �f�g��----------- ( ) Y United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 10thday of July ,20 03,to Police Department and Municipal Courts Renovation and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 29th day of July 2003 . PM Insurance Company of -.-the West Sandia Construction, Inc. Surety _ (Company Name) ti By. By: Greg M. Durbin itle) evin J Dunn, Attorney —In —Fact (P ' ed Name) (Signature President (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby �•• designates Kevin J. Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of'such suretyship. Insurance Comnannv of the West Surety ./ p ^' * By: l (Title) Kevin J. Dunn/Attorney-In-Fact Approved as to form: s City a ock y: - k Ci orney " Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 P" L-M M— Ima 0 0— No.0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casuafty""and I Stir - et . y 1C, o mp , a " n , y ...... ...... KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized-undi" 'laws of State of CaGfomia, The' Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty an urety Company, a Cor-poration duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Com'panies'j, do hereby appoint IKEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, M"HENTHORK, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI' their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and'suretyb6n and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly a-uthoirized o wers this 16th day of January, 2001. ,.00PAN?, I -RP0RA- SEAL IONA 91 0 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego ss. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE ]EXPLORER INSURANCE -COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND -SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Exccutiive-MC6 President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hat m-um'and John W Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their au'thoriz:ed capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. NORMAPORTER COMM. #1257540 NOTARY PUBLIC*-CALIFOANIA th SAN DIEGO COUNTY 0 My Commission Expires MARCH 19, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, -together with the gecietary"or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named asAttorfiey(s)-in-Fac:t to date, execute . , . . sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stimpffig, printing, typinj" or photocopying." CERTIFICATE L the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and lindepende, . nce I Casualty and Suietyt6rapan�,'& hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and'effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were --d-uly-ado'pted .6 y - the h . e respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in fall -foicii.- IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 29th day of July 2003 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800477-TI I I and ask for the Surety Division. P16as6 refer !6-ffiP;6 of At* t o'm- e yNui6e-r',`— the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please conta6tSui6ty Claims,- 1CW Group' , 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92 13 0-2 04 5 or call (8 5 8) 3 50 -24 00. P— LC.W. GROUP Insurance Company of The West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 P.O. BOX 85563, San Diego, CA 92186-5563 (858) 350-2400 FAX (858) 350-2707 www.icwgroup.com Bond Number: 208 49 16- Terrorism Risk Rider This rider addresses the requirements of the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002. In accordance with the above Act, we are providing this disclosure notice for all bonds on which -� one or more of the above identified companies is a surety. Coverage for certified acts of terrorism is included in the attached bond and will be partially -reimbursed.by the United States under a formula established by the Act. The United States will pay 90% of covered terrorism losses in excess of a statutory established deductible to the insurance company issuing the bond. In no way will the payment for loss on this bond exceed the limit of liability under this bond. This rider does not provide coverage for any loss that would otherwise be excluded by the terms -* of this bond. The portion of the premium, for this bond, attributable to coverage for certified acts of terrorism under the Act is One Dollar ($1.00). am Important Notice: The cost of terrorism coverage is subject to change on any bond that premium is charged annually. IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 , Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute. concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. I p" tr CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DATE (MMIDDNY) ACORD,,, CERTIFICATE OF _LIABILITY INSURANCE 07/29/2003 PRODUCER (806) 785-1988 FAX (806) 785-2155 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Gallagher Inwest ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P.O. Box 53910 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, TX 79453-3910 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED Sandia Construction, Inc. INSURER A: Bituminous Casualty Corporation 2723 81st Street INSURERB: Texas Mutual Ins. Co. Lubbock, TX 79423 INSURERC: Fireman's Fund Insurance Co. (McGee) INSURER D: INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DAT M DlYY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MM DIYY LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY CLP3159083 02/17/2003 02/17/2004 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,000 CLAIMS MADE a OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 A X Addl . Insd. &Waiver PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GL3084 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG $ 2,000,000 PROJECT LOC POLICY FX1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY CAP3159084 02/17/2003 02/17/2004 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT X ANY AUTO (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY $ ALL OWNED AUTOS A SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) BODILY INJURY $ X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) X Addl.Insd. TE9901b PROPERTY DAMAGE $ X1 TE2046a Waiver (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO $ AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESS LIABILITY UP2570367 02/17/2003 02/17/2004 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ A $ $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND TSF0001113473 02/17/2003 02/17/2004 X I TORY L MISTS OER B EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE ---EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 IT y R uiFlders Risk XI97702031 08/16/2002 08/16/2003 $5,000,000 per jobsite C $2,500 Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATION§fVEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY FVNDORSEMENTISPECIAL PROVISIONS e: ITB#081-03/RS - Policy Department & Municipal Courts Renovation lanket Additional Insured included on General Liability & Business Auto Liability policies except orkers Compensation. Blanket Waiver of Subrogation included on all policies as required by ritten contract. %.CR I Ir I%.A I C nvLUCI[ ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: l.Nrvl.C4LA 1 Ivry SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, CITY OF LUBBOCK BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY w, P.O. BOX 2000 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS O6A41,4_RREPRESENTATIVES. LUBBOCK, TX 79457 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE AM Mike Henthorn, CIC/DAA ACORD 25S (7/97) ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 e" IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER �.- The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25-S (7197) r* WORKERS' COMPENSATION ANC cMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY Ttexasmut".M InsuranceCompany WC 42 03 04 A -� TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT ." This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization ( X ) Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium INCLUDED, SEE INFORMATION PAGE This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following "attaching clause" need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement, effective on at 12:01 A.M. standard time, forms a part of R*e Policy No. TSF-0001 113473 20030217 of the Texas Mutual Insurance Company Issued to SAND I A CONSTRUCTION INC r^ Endorsement No. Premium $ / Authorized Representative WC420304A (ED. 1-01-2000) / aw INSURED'S COPY CXCUELLA 2-21-2003 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUILDERS EXTENDED LIABILITY COVERAGE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM It is agreed that the provisions listed below apply only upon the entry of QX in the box next to the caption of such provision. A. XD Partnership and Joint Venture Extension J. X❑ Broadened Conditions B. Q Blanket Additional Insureds - Construction K. Blanket Additional Insureds -Equipment C. XQ Contracts Blanket Waiver of Subrogation L. XX Leases Insured Contract Extension - Railroad Property and Construction Contracts D XO Extended Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal M. X� Turnkey Jobs - Coverage For Alienated Premises E. XD Unintentional Failure to Disclose Hazards N. X❑ Construction Project General Aggregate Limits F. XQ Broadened Mobile Equipment O. XX Fellow Employee Coverage G. Q Personal Injury - Contractual Coverage P. XQ Property Damage Liability - Elevators H. Q Nonemployment Discrimination Q. Property Damage to the Named Insured's Work I. Q Liquor Liability R. X� Care, Custody or Control A. PARTNERSHIP AND JOINT VENTURE EXTENSION „" The following provision is added to SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED: The last full paragraph which reads as follows: No person or organization is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership, joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations. is deleted and replaced with the following: With respect to the conduct of any past or present joint venture or partnership not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations and of which you are or were a partner or member, you, and others identified in items 1.a., 1.b., and 1.c., subject to the conditions and limitations contained therein, are insureds, but only with respect to liability arising out of "your work" on behalf of any partnership or joint venture not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, provided no other similar liability insurance is available to you for "your work" in connection with your interest in such partnership or joint venture. A partnership or joint venture, not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, of which you have 33% or more ownership interest at the time of "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused by an "occurrence" or "personal and advertising injury" caused by an offense, is an insured, provided that no other similar liability insurance is available to that partnership or joint venture. GL-3084 (12/01 ) -1- B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSUREDS - CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include: Any person or organization for whom you are performing operations if you and such person or organization have agreed in a written contract or written agreement executed prior to any loss that such person or organization will be added as an additional insured on your policy but only with respect to "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused, at least in part, by your negligence and with respect to liability resulting from: 1. Your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s), or 2. Acts or omissions of the additional insured(s) in connection with their general supervision of such operations. With respect to the insurance afforded these additional insureds pursuant to this endorsement and the above referenced General Liability Form, the following additional provisions apply to limit that coverage: 1. We will have no duty to defend the additional insured against any "suit" seeking damages for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal. and advertising injury," until we receive written notice from the additional insured requesting that we defend it in the "suit." 2. The Limits of Insurance applicable to the additional insureds under this endorsement are those specified in the written contract or agreement requiring this coverage, or as stated in SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE of the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM, whichever is less. These Limits of Insurance are inclusive of and not in addition to the Limits of Insurance described in SECTION Ill of that form. - 3. As additional conditions of coverage under this form, an additional insured under this endorsement will as soon as practicable: a. Give written notice to us of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim. This shall include: (1) How, when and where the 'occurrence" or offense took place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the 'occurrence" or offense. b. Give written notice to us of a claim or "suit' brought against the additional insured including specifics of the claim or "suit' and the date received. c. Give written notice of such claim or "suit," including a demand for defense and indemnity, to any other insurer who had coverage for the claim or "suit' under its policy(ies), either at the time of, or at any time subsequent to the occurrence of the "bodily injury," "property damage" and/or the offense causing the "personal and advertising injury," which is the basis for such claims or "suit'. (1) Such notification must demand the full coverage available under that policy. (2) The additional insured shall not take any action to waive or limit such other coverage available to it. 4. This insurance does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring after: GL-3084 (12/01) -2- (1) All work on the project (other than service, maintenance, or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) has been completed; or (2) That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of -the same project. b. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" resulting from any act or omission of the additional insured(s) or any of their employees, other than the general supervision of work performed for the additional insured(s) by you. Any coverage provided herein will be excess over any other valid and collectable insurance available to the additional insured(s) whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis unless you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement executed prior to any loss that this insurance will be primary. This insurance will be noncontributory only if you have so agreed in a'written contract or written agreement executed prior to any loss. C. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION Item 8. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 8. Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us and Blanket Waiver of Subrogation. a. If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this Coverage Form, those rights are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing after foss to impair those rights. At our request, the insured will bring "suit" or transfer those rights to. us and help us enforce them. b.. if required by a written contract executed prior to loss, we waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of "your work" for that person or organization. D. EXTENDED NOTICE OF CANCELLATION, NONRENEWAL Item A.2.b. of the COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: A.2.b. 60 days before the effective date of the cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. Item 9. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 9. WHEN WE DO NOT RENEW a. If we choose to nonrenew this policy, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less than 60 days before the expiration date. b. If we do not give notice of our intent to nonrenew as prescribed in a. above, it is agreed that you may extend the period of this policy for a maximum additional sixty(60) days from its scheduled expiration date. Where not otherwise prohibited by law, the existing terms, conditions and rates will remain in effect during that extension period. It is further agreed that so long as it is not otherwise prohibited by law, this one time sixty day extension is the sole remedy and liquidated damages available to the insured as a result of our failure to give the notice as prescribed in 9. a. above. G L-3084 (12/01) -3- E. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS Although we relied on your representations as to existing and past hazards, if unintentionally you should fail to disclose all such hazards at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. F. BROADENED MOBILE EQUIPMENT Item 12.b. of SECTION V - DEFINITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 12.b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to premises, sites or locations you own, rent or occupy. G. PERSONAL INJURY - CONTRACTUAL COVERAGE Exclusion 2.e. of SECTION 1, COVERAGE B is deleted. H. NONEMPLOYMENT DISCRIMINATION Unless "personal and advertising injury" is excluded from this policy: Item 14. of SECTION V - DEFINITIONS, is amended to include: "Personal and advertising injury" also means embarrassment or humiliation, mental or emotional distress, physical illness, physical impairment, loss of earning capacity or monetary loss, which is caused by "discrimination." SECTION V - DEFINITIONS, is amended to include: 23. "Discrimination" means the unlawful treatment of individuals based on race, color, ethnic origin, age, gender or religion. Item 2. Exclusions of SECTION I, COVERAGE B, is amended to include: (o) Arising out of "discrimination" directly or indirectly related to the past employment, employment or prospective employment of any person or class of persons by any insured; (p) Arising out of "discrimination" by or at your, your agents or your "employees" direction or with your, your agents or your "employees" knowledge or consent; (q) Arising out of "discrimination" directly or indirectly related to the sale, rental, lease or sub- lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub -lease of any dwelling, permanent lodging or premises by or at the direction of any insured; or (r) Fines, penalties, specific performance or injunctions levied or imposed by a governmental entity, or governmental code, law, or statute because of "discrimination." I. LIQUOR LIABILITY Exclusion 2.c. of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, is deleted. J. BROADENED CONDITIONS Items 2.a. and 2.b. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, are deleted and replaced with the following: 2. Duties in the event of an occurrence, claim or suit: GL-3084 (12/01•) -4- n a. You must see to it that we are notified of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim as soon as practicable after the 'occurrence" has been reported to you, one of your officers or an "employee" designated to give notice to us. Notice should include: (1) How, when and where the "occurrence" or offense took place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. b. If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against any insured, you must: (1) Record the specifics of the claim or "suit' and the date received as soon as you, one of your officers, or an "employee" designated to record such information is notified of it; and (2) Notify us in writing as soon as practicable after you, one of your officers, your legal department or an "employee" you designate to give us such notice learns of the claims or "suit." Item 2.e. is added to SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS: 2.9. If you report an 'occurrence" to your workers compensation insurer which develops into a liability claim for which coverage is provided by the Coverage Form, failure to report such "occurrence" to us at the time of "occurrence" shall not be deemed in violation of paragraphs 2.a., 2.b., and 2.c.. However, you shall give written notice of this "occurrence" to us as soon you are made aware of the fact that this 'occurrence" may be a liability claim rather than a workers compensation claim. K. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSUREDS - EQUIPMENT LEASES SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include any person or organization with whom you agree in a written equipment lease or rental agreement to name as an additional insured with respect to liability arising out of the maintenance, operation, or use by you of the equipment leased to you by such person or organization, subject to the following additional exclusions. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to: 1. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring after you cease leasing the equipment. 2. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of the sole negligence of the additional insured. 3. "Property damage" to: a. Property owned, used or occupied by or rented to the additional insured; or b. Property in the care, custody or control of the additional insured or over which the additional insured is for any purpose exercising physical control. L. INSURED CONTRACT EXTENSION - RAILROAD PROPERTY AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS Item 9. of SECTION V - DEFINITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following. 9. "Insured Contract' means: a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner is not an "insured contract"; GL-3084 (12/01) -5- b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; f. That part of any other contract or agreement pertaining to your business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which you assume the tort liability of another party to pay for "bodily injury" or "property damage" to a third person or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. Paragraph f. does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage; or (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or failure to render professional services, including those listed in (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. M. TURNKEY JOBS - COVERAGE FOR ALIENATED PREMISES It is agreed that: Exclusion 2.1.(2) of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, does not apply if the premises are "your work" and were not occupied, rented or held for rental by you for more than 12 months after completion. N. CONSTRUCTION PROJECT GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMITS This modifies SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE. A. For all sums which can be attributed only to ongoing operations at a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an "occurrence" under SECTION I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I - COVERAGE C: 1. A separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit applies to each construction project, and that Limit is equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. 2. The Construction Project General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of all damages under COVERAGE A, except damages because of "bodily injuryor "property damage" included in the "products -completed operations hazard," and for medical expenses under COVERAGE C regardless of the number of: a. Insureds; b. Claims made or "suits" brought; or G L-3084 (12/01) -6- C. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits." 3. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical .� expenses shall reduce the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for that construction project Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown -in-:,the Declarations nor shall they reduce any other Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for any other construction project. 4. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, Fire Damage and Medical Expense continue to apply. However, instead of being subject to the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, such limits will be subject to the applicable Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. B. For all sums which cannot be attributed only to ongoing operations at a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an "occurrence" a under SECTION I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I - COVERAGE C: 1. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the amount available under the General Aggregate Limit or the Products -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit, whichever is applicable; and 2. Such payments shall not reduce any Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. +^ C. Payments for damages because of "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the "products - completed operations hazard" will reduce the Products -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit, and not reduce the General Aggregate Limit nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. D. If a construction project has been abandoned, delayed, or abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. E. The provisions of SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to be applicable. h- O. FELLOW EMPLOYEE COVERAGE Exclusion 2.e. Employers Liability of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, is deleted and replaced with the o^ following: 2.e. "Bodily injury" to (1) An "employee" of the insured arising out of and in the course of: (a) Employment by the insured; or (b) Performing duties related to the conduct of the insured's business; or (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that "employee" as a consequence of paragraph (1) above. This exclusion applies: (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an employer or in any other capacity; and e^ (2) To any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury. .� This exclusion does not apply to: GL-3084 (12/01) -7- (1) Liability assumed by the insured under an "insured contract"; or (2) Liability arising from any action or omission of a co -"employee" while that co -"employee" is either in the course of his or her employment or performing duties related to the conduct of your business. Item 2. a. (1)(a) of SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED, is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.a. (1)(a) To you, to your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture) or to your members (if you are a limited liability company), or to your "volunteer workers" while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. Item 3.a. of SECTION 11- WHO IS AN INSURED, is deleted. P. PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY - ELEVATORS "Property damage" liability is changed as follows: 1. Exclusions 2.1.(3) and 2.j.(4) of SECTION 1, COVERAGE A, do not apply to the use of elevators. 2. The insurance afforded by reason of this provision is excess over any valid and collectible property insurance (including any deductible portion thereof) available to the insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, and the OTHER INSURANCE condition is changed accordingly. Q. PROPERTY DAMAGE TO THE NAMED INSURED'S WORK Exclusion I of SECTION I, COVERAGE A. is deleted and replaced with the following: I. Damage to Your. Work "Property damage" to "your work" arising out of it or any part of it and included in the "products completed operation hazard." This exclusion does not apply if the damaged work or the work out of which the damage arises was performed on your behalf by a subcontractor. This exclusion also does not apply to loss up to $50,000 if the damaged work and the work out of which the damage arises was performed by you. R. CARE, CUSTODY OR CONTROL Exclusion 2.j.4 of SECTION I, COVERAGE A. is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.1.4 Personal property in the care, custody or control of the insured. However, for personal property in the care, custody or control of you or your "employees," this exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of $25,000 per occurrence, subject to the following terms and conditions; (a) The most that we will pay under this provision as an annual aggregate is $100,000, regardless of the number of occurrences. (b) This provision does not apply to "employee" owned property or any property that is missing where there is not physical evidence to show what happened to the property. (c) The aggregate limit for this coverage provision is part of the General Aggregate Limit and SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE is changed accordingly. GL-3084 (12/01) -8- 0M {d) In the event of damage to or destruction of property covered by this exception, you shall, if requested by us, replace the property or furnish the labor and materials necessary for repairs thereto, at actual cost to you, exclusive of prospective profit or overhead charges of any nature. (e) $2,500 shall be deducted from the total amount of all sums you became obligated to pay as damages on account of damage to or destruction of all property of each person or organization, including the loss of use of that property, as a result of each 'occurrence." Our limit of liability under the endorsement as being applicable to each 'occurrence" shall be reduced by the amount of the deductible indicated above; however, our aggregate limit of liability under this provision shall not be reduced by the amount of such deductible. The conditions of the policy, including those with respect to duties in the event of "occurrence," claims or "suit" apply irrespective of the application of the deductible amount. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or "suit" and, upon notification of the action taken, you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. MW GL-3084 (12101) -9- TE 20 46A CHANGES IN TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM GARAGE COVERAGE FORM TRUCKERS COVERAGE FORM This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below: Endorsement Effective Policy Number CAP 3 159 084 Named Insured Countersigned by kAuinorizea hepreseniaiive) The CONDMON entitled `TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US" does not apply to Any person or organization for whom the named insured is operating under a written contract when such contract requires a waiver of subrogation. Additional Premium $ 100. Minimum _ will be retained by us regardless of any early termina- tion of this endorsement or the policy. Premium (Included) (1% Blanket) FORM TE 20 46A — CHANGES IN TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US .., (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) Texas Standard ALdorrIOblle Endorsement Hart Forms r£ Services Prescribed Marsh 18, 19M Reorder No. 24-1163 TE9901B ADDITIONAL INSURED This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM GARAGE COVERAGE FORM TRUCKERS COVERAGE FORM This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below: Endorsement Effective Policy Number CAP 3 159 084 Named Insured Countersigned by ®, (Autnonzea Representative) The provisions and exclusions that apply to LIABILITY COVERAGE also apply to this endorsement. Any person or organization for whom the insured has agreed by written contract to designate as an additional insured subject to all the provisions and limitations of this policy.. (Enter Name and Address of Additional Insured.) is an insured, but only with respect to legal responsibility for acts or omissions of a person for whom Liability Coverage is afforded under this policy. The additional insured is .not required to pay for any premiums stated in the policy or earned from the policy. Any return premium and any dividend, if applicable, declared by us shall be paid to you. You are authorized to act for the additional insured in all matters pertaining to this insurance. We will mail the additional insured notice of any cancellation of this policy. If the cancellation is by us, we will give ten days notice to the additional insured. The additional insured will retain any right of recovery as a claimant under this policy. v FORM TE 99 01B — ADDITIONAL INSURED .� Texas Standard Automobile Endorsement Prescribed March 18, 1992 Hart Forms & Services Reorder No. 24-1 M CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: . (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: .�. (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. s®+ 2 era REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. o 3 No Text P" a" CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 10th day of July, 2003 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, Sandia Construction, Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. W ITNESSETH: That for and inconsideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #081-031RS - POLICE DEPARTMENT & MUNICIPAL COURTS RENOVATION - $913,500.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with MR the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, �* Texas in the year and day first above written. • City lecretary • - -• ED -Rep-nfati • OR -A r�11 R ATTEST: Corpor to Se retary ` . 1 1 CITY OF OCK S (OWNER) By: M RC UGAL, MAYGR- = CONTRACTOR: AM By: b444�- ._ ,s 1 PA", COMPLETE ADDRESS: Sandia Construction, Inc. 2723 81 st Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 P" I !OM GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit SANDIA CONSTRUCTION, INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative HARLAN STAUFFER, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder e. y for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," cr words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless 61 otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 0" 10. LAYOUT Except as specifical'y provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the e.,<.ecuted work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. °" 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority tc stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) '""+ 2 G.z calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and conpleton of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or .w* Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the ++ work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 3 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20, SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that maybe contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection; testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation.and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. _ 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not inconformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy - such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. w , If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered ' by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where theContractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." 5 No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an _ Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. .•d 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE ,.. The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. '^ All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. ,.. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBB6dK*As AN ADDITIONAL INSURED AND"PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED.' IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. A. General Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard - Underground Damage Hazard °^ Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, L0 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, W to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance, The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1,000,000.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's _ or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 0406,096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the M' project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 14 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will 9 provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. _ (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute'of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the, duration of the project; 10 F (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; A (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, •" to: F (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; t _ (..) p g P P ii provide a certifcate'of coverage to the Contractor prior that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' r, compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate e, insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new -certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 12 1 ` 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may M enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 4 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set c forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. P+ It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial ' completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and r, is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. C IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME 1S OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this 13 contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except — where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in anyway, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, 14 against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. d** Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to v enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, .� if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding ` the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 15 44. 45. 46. 47 FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of.fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 16 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with �^* diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective r- manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the 6: sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of Aw the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost i under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which .w would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over ..� to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and 17 his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually _ performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect,until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the — prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 18 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 19 Aft CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS «.. P* k .,, RE: RESOLUTION NO.2002-R0483, NOVEMBER 14, 2002 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates .y Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor �* Bricklayer k ' Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper ' Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Journey Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Apprentice Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified Hourly Rate 11.50 12.00 7.50 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 9.00 11.00 15.00 8.00 10.00 9.00 18.00 10.00 9.50 10.50 10.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 1 Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrical Repairer -Equipment Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer -General Laborer -Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machine Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grader Operator Roller Scraper Tractor -Trailer Truck Driver -Heavy Truck Driver -Light EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Hourly Rate 9.00 7.50 9.00 7.50 12.50 6.50 8.00 6.50 6.00 6.75 9.00 7.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 9.00 8.00 10.25 7.00 7.50 8.50 8.00 7.00 N EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. F y s.I �A 14 l.. y No Text No Text DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12- ^ FURNISHINGS , .^ DIVISION 13-SPECIAL � . _ Not Used �^ ^ - D������K�y���- ~~~,~-_,.. SYSTEMS Not Used c~ DIVISION - D5MECHANICAL ` 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical ........................................ _-_-,r--_--'ll� 15300 Piping and Accessories ............................................................................................................... 7 `- l53lO -'_-'�=.-^_'_----.____---_..----__'_.__'__--.—__-'_'-_'_-._.---3 � 15330 Chilled and Heating Water Systems ................................................... —_-.-----.................. 2 15390 Marking and Identification ......................................................................................................... 3 15400 Air Distribution ........................................................................................................................... 7 �~ 15500 Hangers and Supports _------'---._-.-._--_'--'---','_-.------__,_'-'_-.'-3 15600 Insulation ................................................................................................................................... 3 =° 15700 � ..--''--._.----_.._—',~.—_—'----_..'-___—_---.-''—..—_ll 15800 Testing,- - Mechanical —_---.----..—.—_----..---.-.2 15900 Temperature Regulation -----_.----_---.----'----..._.---'-._'--_.-_--'''--7 DIVISION - 16ELECTRICAL +- 16010 Basic Electrical -._-----..—.—_--_.---------..-_'_-_—_—.-_-----'4 ~ 16110 Raceways --'_---.-..--_--.'--'-_~--__..._.—_-'_._--'-'—.'_.---_'--.4 16120 Wires and Cables ....................................................................................................................... 4 16130 Boxes ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 16140 Wiring Devices .......................................................................................................................... 3 Was, .� 03879602 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 � ~' 05/03 ... 16170 Grounding and Bonding ................... ..........................................................................................2 16195 Electrical Identification.........................................................:....................................................3 16441 Safety Switches ................................. .................3 16470 Panelboards......................................................................................:.........................................4 16510 Lighting......................................................................................................................................3 16610 Fire Alarm and Detection System p AIAA a �J` P NOO �,92 C� 0� � C� y 14746 P* 0 F 03879602 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 4 FOS 05/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION Not Used DIVISION.1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary ........................................................................................................................... 3 01300 Administrative Requirements................................................................................................... 4 01330 Submittal Procedures. ...... ..... .. .... ..... .... ......... 5 01400 Quality Requirements .... ... ........ 4 01500 Temporary Facilities & Controls ................................................... ................ 3 01600 Product Requirements............................................................................................................... 3 01650 Starting of Systems................................................................................................................ 2 01700 Execution Requirements............................................................................................................ 3 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling........................................................................................... 4 02521 Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks.................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE r Not Used DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry ............................................................................................................................. 7 DIVISION 5 - METAL 05805 Expansion Joint Assemblies .................... �fl . RED AR a; c� 9� e" 14746 }Q OF f Zov1 03879602 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 �"" 05/03 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06400 Architectural Woodwork........................................................................................................... 7 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation.................................................................................................................... 3 07900 Joint Sealers............................................................................................................... ....... 6 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08000 Door Schedule........................................................................................................................... 5 08110 Steel Doors and Frames...................................................................................................... 4 08211 Flush Wood Doors.................................................................................................................... 4 08700 Hardware................................................................................................................................. 13 08800 Glazing...............:...................................................................................................................... 4 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09220 Portland Cement Plaster............................................................................................................ 4 09250 Gypsum Board Systems............................................................................................................. 7 09300 Tile ............ ................................................................................................................ 5 09510 Acoustical Ceilings.................................................................................................................... 5 09650 Resilient Flooring and Base....................................................................................................... 4 09680 Carpeting...................................................................................................................................3 09900 Painting................................................................................................................................... 11 09915 Color and Finish Schedule........................................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10100 Visual Display Boards............................................................................................................... 3 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments....................................................................................................... 3 10210 Metal Wall Louvers................................................................................................................... 4 10260 Corner Guards........................................................................................................................... 3 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets................................................................................................ 3 10800 Toilet Accessories.................................................................................................................... 6 �- ,�-D °o cy% 92 n Q 14746 }P� + 0 F u 03879602 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2 05/03 OW4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 2k, 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15300 Piping and Accessories 15310 Plumbing Systems • NORRIS NING 15330 Chilled and Heating Water Systems 22312 ' ®;r� 15390 Marking and Identification .0 15400 Air Distribution 15500 Hangers and Supports 15600 Insulation 15700 Equipment 15800 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 15900 Temperature Regulation DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements OF 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Boxes .16H N FANNING X 16140 Wiring Devices ..... :..'Jo 16170 Grounding and Bonding 34307 '74 16195 Electrical Identification 01 16441 Safety Switches ~ A 16470 Panelboards 16510, Lighting 16610 Fire Alarm and Detection System 03879602 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY PAGE - 1 05/03 i w� SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and y Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project; Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Work by Owner. C. Owner furnished products. D. Contractor use of site and premises. !^ E. Work Sequence. b F. Owner occupancy. A, 1.3 PROJECT; WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Without force or effect, work of the Project consists of the renovation of the existing ground floor courtroom, jury room, law library and toilet rooms of Municipal Court, the renovation of the second floor unoccupied space west of Police Administration, the renovation of the existing unoccupied Northeast comer of the second floor and the renovation of the existing auditorium. Renovations include architectural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical components. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award contracts which will commence on the date indicated in a Notice to R Proceed. Work under this contract will include: 1. Existing Interior Building Demolition: The Owner has contracted for demolition of the existing interior partitions, flooring, ceiling, mechanical, plumbing and electrical items as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Existing Building Renovations: The Owner has contracted for the interior renovation to include new partitions, flooring, ceilings, mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems as indicated on the Contract Documents. B. Items noted NIC' (Not in Contract), furnishings and minor equipment will be furnished and installed by Owner after the Contractor has completed work in that particular area. C. Owner will remove and retain possession of the following items prior to start of work: 1. All demolition associated with the existing auditorium. D. Items Furnished by Owner For Final Connection by Contractor: 1. Existing 4' lab hood. 2. Existing air compressor. ., 3. Existing vacuum chamber. 03879602 SUMMARY 01100 - 1 r 05/02 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner: 1. All office furnishings. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Owner. 3. Use of site and premises by public. B. Time Restrictions for Performing Interior Work: will be coordinated with the Owner, at the Pre -Construction Meeting. 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in phases to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Architect: 1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the premises during entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 03879602 SUNB4ARY 01100 - 2 05/02 No Text No Text n, SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary g PP tary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Cutting and patching. F. Alteration project procedures. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparationfor Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. 03879602 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1 05/02 H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site with Owner for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting before Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Security and housekeeping procedures. - f. Schedules. g. Procedures for maintaining record documents. h. Requirements for start-up of equipment. i. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants with two copies to Architect and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Owner will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum monthly intervals. B. Owner will make arrangements for meetings. The Architect will preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, and Architect, W as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 03879602 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2 05/02 ., n 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING C Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 03879602 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 3 05/02 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. J 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. f_ D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. 3.4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experience installer to perform cutting and patching. C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. D. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition unless otherwise specified. E. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. F. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect for review. H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a _ smooth transition for Architect review. v I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. END OF SECTION 03879602 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 4 05/02 —. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ;.e. A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. r C. Proposed products list. D. Shop drawings. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Design data. H. Test reports. I. Certificates. J. Manufacturers' instructions. K. Manufacturers' field reports. L. Erection drawings. M. Construction photographs. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and reports; Testing Laboratory Services. B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit to Architect for review for limited_ purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. C. Transmit each submittal with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's name, address and phone number. D. Sequentially number transmittal forms using Section number or Contractors other sequential numbering system. E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal. M F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or _initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. a� 03879602 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 ^, 05/03 G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business address. Coordinate submission of related items. H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. J. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. M. Format 1. Submit all submittals using an 8 Y2 x 11 inch format. 2. For submittals larger than 8'/z x 11 inches, prefold to an 8'/2 x 11 format. Submittals not pre -folded will be rejected. N. At Architect's option, submittals will not be individually marked, but will be reviewed using Architect's standard submittal review form. O. Copies Required 1. Structural and Architectural Submittals: Number of copies Contractor requires plus three copies which will be retained by Architect. 2. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Submittals: Number of copies Contractor requires plus four copies which will be retained by Architect and one by the Engineer. 1.5 RESUBMTTTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as specified and as noted on submittal reviews. B. Mark as RESUBMTTTAL. C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric suffix for each re -submittal 1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate for Architect's review within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. _ D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work day of each week. E. Submit computer generated network analysis schedule as specified in Section 01323. _ F. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. G. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. w H. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, including Owner furnished products, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. I. Indicate delivery dates for Owner furnished products. 03879602 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 05/03 eAa J. Revisions To Schedules: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect, including effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. B. Drawing Size: Minimum 8'/z x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches. C. Form 1. For drawings larger than 11 x 17 inches, submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2. For drawings 11 x 17 inches and smaller, submit opaque reproductions. D. Draw details to a minimum size of 1/2 inches equal to 1 foot. E. Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings. +�+ F. Draw all other plans to a minimum size of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot. G. At Architect's option, depending on extent of review comments, either all opaque copies will be marked or only the reproducible will be marked and returned to the Contractor to make copies required. 1.9 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. B. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. C. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work and building utilities where applicable. D. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 — Execution Requirements. 1.10 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples of finishes from manufacturers' full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns, for Architect's selection. g 03879602 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 05/03 C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations. D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style and color on each sample. E. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. — F. Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in individual _ specification section. 1.11 DESIGN DATA A. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.12 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.13 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.14 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. B.. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.15 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in. Contract Documents. 03879602 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 05/03 — I PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION i P" '10 9 A.., SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality control and control of installation. B. Tolerances. C. References. D. Mock-up requirements. E. Testing and Inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. G. Examination H. Preparation 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS . A. Section 01420 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01330 Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. C. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. D. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Starting of Systems. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers'instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.5 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. 03879602 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 e" 05/03 B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C.. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing in place. 1.6 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. — B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by Code. C. Obtain copy of standards when required by specification section. D. Neither contractual relationship, duties nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to Owner and Architect to perform specified inspection and testing. 1. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect or the Owner. I. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off -site testing as required by Architect or Owner. D. Submitted independent firm's reports to the Architect, in triplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Owner, Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory does not relieve Contractor from performing Work to contract requirements. G. Perform re -testing and/or re -inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements using the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect or Owner. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price. H. Agency Responsibilities: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 03879602 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 05/03 n r. r� 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. F" 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. R- 6. Perform additional tests required by Architect. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to +�* Contractor. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. J. Limits On Testing Authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of P . Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD REPORTS article. r-s PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 03879602 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 '"�" 05/03 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. END OF SECTION 03879602 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4 05/03 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout; final cleaning. 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Power Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor as required. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electric Code. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level !^ of 2 watts/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. a C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security w .k purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, ,,..� pigtails, and lamps as required. tE 03879602 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 1 'k"'" 05/03 E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. As a minimum, provide mobile telephone service for the on -site superintendent and home office telephone service. 1.8 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.9 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing designated facilities may be used during construction operations. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. B. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition than originally found. 1.10 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction — operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights - of -way and for public access to existing building. —_ C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.11 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks. 1.12 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. 03879602 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 2 05/03 A B. Construction: Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; insulate to R-11 with maximum Flame Spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.13 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, roof, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished walkways, drives, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.14 SECURITY A. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.15 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. �^ 1.16 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. a•, B. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent s facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used P, END OF SECTION w, 03879602 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 3 "" 05/03 I SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. Testing Laboratory Services. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. ,., B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. t. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. D. Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to adjacent existing work. The Architect shall be the sole authority in determination of acceptable work. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities } are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, �^ disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accord with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. 03879602 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 '" 05/03 B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide — ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured warehouse approved by the Architect and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off -site _ storage facilities. Products properly stored in off -site storage facilities may be included in progress pay requests with written approval of the Architect. C. Handling — 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer, or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this Section. B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. E. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 03879602 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 05/03 5. Will reimburse Owner, Architect and Engineer for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: u, 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. r*+ , PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used i.. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION e, P�1 �S 03879602 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 05/03 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. s C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. '^ 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. �* B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. .., C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual ,e with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. 03879602 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 05/03 E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879602 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 05/03 m SECTION 01700 ^^ EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS r.. PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. 03879602 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 05/03 1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. —. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8 Vh x 11 inch text pages, bound in three D-ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection. D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 03879602 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 05/03 H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. �+ 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC .� systems. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS p.. A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. -t PART 2 -PRODUCTS ^' Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879602 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3 �* 05/03 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re -connection. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit. D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice to Owner. E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are.discovered. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Section 01100 - Summary: Work sequence. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Section 01330 - Submittals: Work schedule. B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. D. Perform noisy, malodorous, or dusty work: 1. As coordinated with the Owner. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect or Owner. Do not resume operations until directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated. B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit �. continued Owner occupancy. D. Where demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust -proof partitions of minimum 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch drywall (joints taped) on occupied side, 1/2-inch fire -retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound -deadening insulation. " E. Protect existing materials and equipment which are not to be demolished. F. Provide protective covers over existing carpet, vinyl composition, sheet vinyl and ceramic tile flooring, and stairs, including floor finish in elevator. G. Provide elevator manufacturer's standard protective padding on elevator walls. 03879602 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 2 05/03 H. Provide temporary protective comer protection at all outside corners along route for removal of refuse. own I. Do not store nor pile demolition materials nor equipment on any part of the structure in a manner that would cause permanent damage. J. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. K. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 4 L. Mark location and termination of utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance • notice to Architect if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. M. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. = N. Set refuse containers at location approved by Owner. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. P. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, remove, cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. D. Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations. E. Remove temporary Work. F. Demolish plaster in small sections. Cut plaster at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. G. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 1. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. H. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. I. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 3.3 DISPOSAL - A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Owner to create the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations. B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site. C. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Remove materials as Work progresses. 03879602 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 3 05/03 3.4 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Items: 1. Carefully remove, clean, and deliver to Government at location as directed by the Owner, the items indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. 2. Carefully remove, clean, store and protect for re -use the items indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Repair damaged pavement under refuse containers and return to original condition. B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent finishes. C. Shampoo all soiled carpet along the refuse removal route. Repair or replace carpet along the refuse removal route which has been damaged. Make repairs to satisfaction of Owner. D. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. E. Remove protections and leave exterior areas broom clean. F. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Retum elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. G. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work. END OF SECTION 03879602 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 4. 05103 y 1 y SECTION 02521 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS _ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract For Construction and Division 1 General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete driveways, sidewalks and miscellaneous concrete paving work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers: Joint sealants used in concrete sidewalks. 1.4 SUB=ALS A. Certificates: I. The Contractor shall furnish results of tests made by a competent commercial laboratory on each material source he proposes to use before start of construction and material shall not be shipped until such results have been examined by the Architect and the source of material approved. Laboratory mix designs and conformation cylinders will not be required for this project. However, the proposed mix for each class of concrete shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to placing any concrete. The cost of all pre -construction tests shall be borne by the Contractor. Additional test certificates shall be furnished on the aggregate if the material source is changed. B. Reinforcing 1. Four (4) sets of Fabrication shop drawings -shall be furnished the Architect and shall receive his approval before any reinforcing steel is fabricated. C. Curing 1. The materials and method of application shall be approved by the Architect before concrete placement begins. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete shall not be placed when the temperature is less than 40' F. and under no circumstances shall it be placed on frozen ground. B. All reinforcement shall be permanently marked with grade identification marks or shall, on delivery, be accompanied by a manufacturer's .guarantee of grade and compliance with these specifications. C. Templates shall be maintained in good condition and warped or bent templates shall not be used ...:._..... 03879602 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 1 05/03 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cement delivered in bags shall be marked plainly with the brand name of the manufacturer and a bag shall contain ninety-four (94) pounds of cement. Cement from different mills, though tested and approved, shall not be mixed. Cement shall be stored and handled in manner which will protect it from dampness and any cement which has become partially set or which contains hard lumps or cakes shall not be used. B. Reinforcement stored on the site shall be protected for accumulations of grease mud or other foreign matter and from rust producing conditions. Bars shall be free from rust, scale, oil, mud or structural defects when incorporated in the structures. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FORMS A. Sidewalk Forms 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I or ASTM C-150, Type III, High Early Strength Cement with approval by the Engineer. B. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand or mixture of such sands, consisting of clean, hard, durable uncoated grains, free from lumps. Deleterious substances shall not exceed the following percentages by weight: Material removed by decantation.............................3.0% ClayLumps.............................................................0.5% Other deleterious substances such as coal, shale coated grains and soft flaky particles..............3.0% 1. The aggregate shall be free from a harmful amount of salt or alkali and, when subjected to the color test for organic impurities shall not have a color darker than Fig. No. 2 (Test in accordance with A.S.T.M. Designation C-40). 2. Material which contains frozen lumps or wood, hay, burlap, paper, dirt or other foreign matter mixed with the aggregate in stock piles or in handling shall not be used 3. Fine aggregate shall be well graded from fine to coarse and shall meet the following requirements (ASTM C-33): Passing 3/8" Sieve........................................100% Passing No. 4 Sieve .............................. 95 - 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve .............................. 80 - 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve .............................. 50 - 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve .............................. 25 - 60%. Passing No. 50 Sieve .............................. 10 - 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve .............................. 2 - 10% 03879602 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 2 05/03 N Pprk C. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed stone, gravel, or crushed gravel, or any combination of them, composed of hard, tough and durable particles free from adherent coating, free of salt, alkali, vegetable matter and soft, friable, thin or elongated particles and the substances listed below `shall not be present in excess of the amounts indicated: Soft Fragments ........................................... 5% by weight Clay Lumps ........................................... 0.25% by weight Removed by decantation ......................... * 1 % by weight (* 1/2 ? percent if consisting essentially of crusher dust) The total deleterious substances shall not exceed 5% by weight 1. Grading of coarse aggregate shall conform to the following requirements (ASTM C-33 Size No. 57): Maximum size - 1?-inch sieve Passing 1-inch sieve.............................. 95 100% Passing 1/2-inch sieve ............................. 25 - 60% Passing No. 4 sieve ................................... 0 - 10% 2. The coarse aggregate shall not show evidence of disintegration, nor show a total loss greater than eighteen (18) percent when subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulphate accelerated soundness test using AASHTO Designation T-104. 3. The percentage of wear shall not be more than 45 at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO Designation T-96. D. Water: Fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali or organic matter. The Contractor will provide at his expense the transportation of the water from the City mains to the places where it is to be used. E. Reinforcing 1. Bar Reinforcement a. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. b. Plain Bars: ASTM, A306, Grade 60. 2. Mesh Reinforcement: ASTM A185, spacing and wire gauge as shown on the drawings. 3. Fiber Reinforcing: "Fiber Mesh" or "Caprolan RC" or approved equal. F. Expansion joint material shall be an approved preformed bituminous impregnated non -extruding type jointing material, 1/2" thick (3/4" thick for machine laid curb and gutter), and shaped to the section of the concrete. G. Fabrication and Placing 1. Accurately fabricate to the dimensions and shapes shown on the drawings in accordance with ACI Manual of Standard Practice unless variations are specifically shown on the drawings. 2.3 PROPORTIONING A. The exact amounts of all material entering into the concrete shall be determined in the field in order to produce the desired durability, density, uniformity, workability and the specified strength. All materials shall be measured separately by methods, satisfactory to the Engineer, which will permit control of the concrete and production of a product of uniform quality. Particular care shall be used in measuring cement and water. One bag of cement will be considered as ninety-four (94) pounds and one gallon of water as eight and thirty-three 03879602 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02512173 05/03 one -hundredths (8.33) pounds. Water contained in the aggregates shall be taken into account in calculating the amount of water to be added to the mixture. The percentage of fine aggregate to total aggregate shall be between 33% and 45%. B. Concrete for the designated uses shall conform to the following: Max. Water Content Min. Cement Content , Compressive U.S. Gallons 94-lb. Sacks Strength, Lbs. Per Sack of Cement Per Cu. Yd. Per Sq. In. Concrete Work 6.5 5.0 3000 at 28 days 2.4 MIXING A. Mix concrete in an approved batch type mixer equipped with a device for measuring the water which is accurate to within two percent (2%). B. Minimum time for mixing each batch after all ingredients are in the mixer: One and one-half (1 1/2) minutes. C. The speed of the mixer shall not exceed that recommended by the manufacturer. D. Excessive overmixing, requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency, will not be permitted. E. Discard concrete not in place within 45 minutes from the time of charging the drum, or which has developed initial hardening. F. Transit mixed concrete conforming to ACI 94 will be acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before placing concrete, sprinkle subgrade or base surface so that it is in a thoroughly moistened condition (but not muddy). B. Oil forms with a light oil before each use and clean forms which are to be reused immediately after use. 3.2 EXCAVATION AND GRADING A. Conform to lines and grades shown on drawings or as established in field for excavation or embankment for curb, gutter, combined curb and gutter, and other miscellaneous concrete work. B. Extend street subgrade six (6) inches beyond the back of curb and compact to 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. C. Where finished street subgrade is more than three (3) inches below bottom of proposed curb grade, fill with compacted caliche base to bring subgrade up to required bottom of curb elevation. 03879602 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 4 05/03 i e .. 3.3 FORMS A. Construct forms accurately to line and grade as established in the field and adequately brace so that they will not move during placing of the concrete. B. Leave forms in place at least twelve (12) hours after placing of concrete. C. Use flexible sheet steel forms for concrete on curves with.a radius of 130 feet or less. D. Forms for concrete paving shall also conform to provisions of this paragraph. .»�. 3.4 JOINTS A. Expansion Joints: Provide an expansion joint oint at tan p p � gent point of each return at intersections, at intervals of not more than forty feet (40) between intersections (odd length sections as directed by Architect), and at end of each day's concrete pour. B. Construction or Contraction Joints 1. Locate at 10-foot intervals, or at each template or as directed by Architect. 2. Form construction or contraction joints for concrete poured in metal forms using metal " template plates accurately shaped to cross-section shown on drawings plans and so constructed that they can be removed during finishing operations. C. Place all joints perpendicular to surface of concrete and to axis of section. 3.5 REINFORCING A. Fiber reinforcing may be used in lieu of wire mesh for pedestrian sidewalks with material and rate of application approved by Architect. *^� B. Hold bars rigidly in place with approved metal devices in accordance with the ACI Detailing Manual. C. Provide 1/z inch of concrete cover for bars in slabs unless otherwise noted on the drawings. .�+ D. Where details on splices are not shown or where unanticipated splices are required, make in a region of minimum stress and of lap length as required by ACI Code. 3.6 CONCRETE A. Deposit in place in such a manner as to require minimum of re -handling and place in a manner which will produce a uniformly dense section, free of honeycomb or other voids, conforming to grade, thickness, and shapes shown on drawings. B. Thoroughly spade or vibrate concrete adjacent to forms or joints in order to eliminate honeycombing. C. Accurately shape concrete work to cross-section shown on drawings or approved by Architect. 3.7 FINISHING A. Finished to a surface of uniform texture by floating with a wood float and troweling. B. Finish both sides of all joints with an approved edging tool before final brushing. C. At construction and contraction joints cut mortar full width of joint, and neatly finish with an approved edging or grooving tool of such design to groove the joint approximately 2" in depth. 03879602 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SID11 EWALKS 02521 - 5 05/03 3.8 PROTECTING AND CURING A. Burlap Method 1. Cover all concrete work with burlap or other suitable material as soon as it has set sufficiently to prevent marking and keep wet continuously for at least four (4) days. B. Care shall be taken to prevent mechanical injury to concrete work during this period and until the work is accepted. C. All work damaged prior to acceptance shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. Curing compound method 1. In lieu of the above method of curing, the concrete may be cured by applying a liquid membrane coating, conforming to ASTM C-30%.-to all exposed surfaces as soon as concrete has set sufficiently. 2. Apply membrane to back and front of concrete as soon as forms have been removed. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Provide suitable means to prevent concrete from freezing for not less than 72 hours after placing. Remove and replace all concrete damaged by freezing. The addition of any admixture of chemicals to the concrete to prevent freezing shall not be allowed, unless specifically approved by the Architect. B. Provide suitable means to protect freshly poured concrete from rain damage. Keep such means readily accessible at all times during placement of concrete. C. Care shall be taken during the backfill and cleanup process not to scrape, chip, crack or otherwise damage the concrete including tire marks from equipment or trucks. All damaged concrete will be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 3.10 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS. A. The removal of all sidewalks and driveways that are required for the construction of the improvements as shown on the plans or as directed by the Architect shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor and no separate payment will be made for this item of work. B. Remove sidewalks and driveways to the limits as directed by the Engineer, and saw cut with a concrete saw unless the concrete is being removed to an existing construction joint. 3.11 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Removed and replace all defective work disclosed after forms have been removed. B. Defective work includes, but is not limited to deficient dimensions, section not constructed to the proper grade, concrete surface bulged, uneven, or shows honeycomb, which in the opinion of the Architect cannot be repaired satisfactorily. END OF SECTION 03879602 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 6 05/03 i SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for, Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division. I - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Mortar and pointing mortar. C. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. D. Loose fill granular insulation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS, A. Section 01400 - Quality Control. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. C. Section 07200 - Building Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. E. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories. B. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, positioning of reinforcement, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 2. Provide data for loose fill insulation. 3. Include design mix complying with the Property specification of ASTM C270, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. 4. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength and masonry unit assembly strength in all planes and supportive test data. C. Reports 1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 03879602 UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 05/03 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section -� with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated masonry construction. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. y B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of door anchors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Featherlite Block Co. B. Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime 1. Essroc Materials, Inc. 2. Glen-Gery Corporation. 3. Lafarge Corporation. 4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 5. Riverton Corporation. C. Mortar Pigments 1. Davis Colors. 2. Lafarge Corporation. 3. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc. D. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inca 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 03879602 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 05/03 4 .'; 5. National Wire Products Industries. 6. Southern Construction Products. E. Admixtures 1. Integral CMU Water Repellent a. W.R. Grace & Co. b. Master Builders, Inc. C. Addiment, Inc. 2. Cold -Weather Admixture a. Euclid Chemical Co. b. W.R. Grace & Co. 3. Water -Repellent Admixture a. W.R. Grace & Co. a b. Master Builders, Inc. C. Addiment, Inc. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled normal weight, with integral water-repellent admixture. B.. Provide special units for 90 degree comers, bond beams and lintels. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation L Granular Insulation: ASTM C516, vermiculite type, water repellent, fire resistant, a flame/smoke contribution of 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi (414 MPa) yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. C. Reinforcing Steel Positioners: 9 gage steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT fl A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Bonding Agent: Epoxy type. F. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using the Property specification with maximum k 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight, silica sand aggregate. G. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color to match existing. 03879602 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 05/03 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture. B. Accelerator: Accelguard 80 or Morset. 2.7 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: Portland cement and lime, ASTM C270, Type S using the Proportion specification. B. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using the Property specification with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or.calcium stearate per cement weight. 2.8 MIX TESTS A. Test mortar in accordance with Section 01400. B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. D. Clean glass units of substances that may impair bond with mortar or sealant. E. Plug clean -out holes with block masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. MORTAR MIXING 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 5. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. 6. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F (5 degrees Q. 03879602 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 05/03 am * B. Coursing 1. General a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm). C. Mortar Joints: Raked. C. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 2. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 3. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. ` 4. Interlock intersections and external corners. 5. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 6. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges. 7. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled. 8. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with acontrol joint. 9. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening. 3. PIace joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm). 3.4 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. C. Install mortar in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beam with 2 No. 4 bars, 1 inch (25 mm) from bottom web. B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of dimensioned position. D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches (300 mm) either "" side of opening. 3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Size control joint in accordance with. Section 07900 for sealant performance. D. Form expansion joint as detailed. 3.7 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, anchor bolts, plates and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches (300 mm) from framed openings. D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.8 INSULATION A. Loose Fill Insulation 1. Place after masonry wall has sufficiently dried and attained optimum moisture content. Place prior to covering cores with bond beams or lintels. 2. Place as wall is erected. Completely fill spaces. 3. Place in lifts. Do not exceed 6 feet (2 m) pouring height. 3.9 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch (1.5 mm). B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13 mm/6 m) or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m). E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/in). F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm). G. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) and minus 0 inches (0 mm). H. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch (1 mm). I. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 03879602 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 05/03 3.11 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. t ` E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. F. Do not scratch or deface units. 3.12 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. -' B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging r completed work. END OF SECTION r �s 03879602 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 05/03 - EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. t, 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion joint assemblies for floor and wall surfaces. " - 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Embedding floor or joint assembles. t " B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Supporting Construction C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Supporting Construction. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Asphaltic backing paint. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide listed and labeled fire rated expansion assemblies where indicated on drawings or where required by applicable code to maintain fire resistance integrity of joints in fire rated floor, wall, and roof assemblies. B. Fire Performance Characteristics - Provide expansion joint cover assemblies identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ANSI/UL 263, NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43-1 or ASTM E-119 and E-814 including hose stream test at full -rated period by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1. Fire Rating - Not less than the rating of adjacent construction 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION a: A. Joint Covers: Permit unrestrained movement of joint without disengagement of cover. B. Allowable Load on Floor Joint Cover Plate: 100 psf uniform load and 300 pounds concentrated load with 1/16 inch deflection from normal position, with maximum 12,000 psi stress at full open position. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and splice locations, miters, layout of the work, affected adjacent construction, anchorage locations, required recesses and substrate. C. Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, profile dimensions, anchorage devices, description of materials and finishes, and listing of reference standards complied with. Describe special movement conditions. s� 03879602 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES 05805 - 1 '^ 05/03 D. Certificates: Submit certificates, copies of independent test reports or research reports showing compliance with fire resistance rating or other specified performance requirement. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rough -in sizes; provide templates for cast -in or placed frames or anchors; required tolerances for item placement. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise proper care in the handling of all work so as not to injure the finished surface, and take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place. B. Deliver materials to the job site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections and assemblies as practical. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Art Manufacturing, Inc.; Wichita, KS. B. Balco Metalines; Wichita, KS. C. Conspec Systems, Inc.; Muncy, PA. D. MM Systems Corp.; Tucker, GA. E. Pawling Corp,; Wassaic, NY. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 _ 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Resilient Filler 1. Type: Silicone, Neoprene, Santoprene or other elastomeric type complying with specified requirements. 2. Conformance a. Silicone: ASTM D2000 M46E, 709, M, UV stabilized, non -flame propagating. b. Polyurethane: ASTM D5476. C. Closed Cell Neoprene: ASTM C509, Option I. d. Dense Neoprene or Santoprene: ASTM C864, UV Stabilized, non -flame propagating. 3. Hardness: Share A durometer, minimum of 40 maximum of 50. 4. Color: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard full range of colors. 5. Exposed Surface Texture: Smooth. C. Fire Membrane: Manufacturer's standard membrane forming ULI listed assembly. — D. Water Barrier: Flexible E.P.D.M., 45 mils thick, conforming to ASTM D4673. E. Threaded Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard cadmium plated steel, galvanized steel or stainless steel. F. Backing Paint: Asphaltic type specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 03879602 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES 05805 - 2 05/03 _, t. 2.3 FABRICATION A.. Joint Covers: Aluminum cover plate, aluminum frame construction, retainers with resilient filler strip, designed to permit plus or minus 50 percent joint movement with full recovery, recess mounted. B. Back paint components in contact with cementitious materials. C. 'Galvanize embedded ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. D. Shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. E. Provide joint components in single length without site splicing. 2.4 FINISHES A. Floor Joints: Mill finish aluminum. B. WallJoints: Clear anodized aluminum complying with AA M32C12A31. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. 3.2 PREPARATION Iw A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. $ B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces for recessed items. C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces. C. Provide removable strippable coating or reinforced cloth tape to protect finish surface. END OF SECTION k k, 03879602 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES 05805 - 3 '"�' 05/03 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ++ PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefmished exposed surfaces. E. Preparation for site finishing concealed surfaces. F. Preparation for installing utilities. + 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers: Seals at adjoining construction. C.Section 09900 - Painting. Site finishing of casework. D. Section 09915 - Color and Finish Schedule. E. Division 15 — Mechanical: Plumbing fixtures. F. Division 16 - Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring. ,._ 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A161.1 - Countertops. .� C. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. D. ANSI A208.2 — Medium Density Fiberboard. E. ASTM D1037 — Evaluating Properties of Wood -Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials. F. AWI - Quality Standards. s G. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. H. BHMA A156.11 -Cabinet Locks. '^ I. CID A -A 1936A - Adhesive, Contact. J. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. K. ISSFA — Definition and Performance Standard for Solid Surface Materials. L. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. M. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and In of Hardwood & Cypress N. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. O. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 03879602 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 1 " 05/03 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawing and Product Data 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in _ numerical sequence, millwork elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. 3. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI custom quality standards and as specified. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Resistant Particleboard 1. Willamette Industries; Albany, OR. 2. Fiber Resin Industries, Inc.; Oconomowoc, WI. 3. Flakeboard Company; St. Stephen, New Brunswick. 4. HambroForest Products; Crescent City, CA. B. Water Resistant Fiberboard 1. Sierra Pine; Martell, CA. 2. Georgia Pacific; Sault Ste. Marie, Ont. C. Hardware 1. Julius Blum, Inc.; Stanley NC. 2. Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC. 3. Hafele America Co.; Archdale, NC. _ 4. H.B. Ives; New Haven, CT. 5. Hewi, Inc.; Lancaster, PA. 6. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co.; Grand Rapids, MI. 7. Liberty Hardware; Greensboro, NC. 8. Rangine Corp.; Millis, MS. 9. Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CN. 03879602 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 2 05/03 i D. Computer Keyboard Drawers AWN - 1. MicroComputer Accessories, Inc.; Englewood CA. E. Casters 1. Bassick Caster Corp.; El Paso, TX. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 6. 2.2 MATERIALS I w I rft� 01 i M. i A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade, average moisture content of 8"p'ercent. B. Hardwood Lumber: NBLA; graded in accordance with AWI premium grade; average moisture content of 8 percent. C. Softwood Plywood: PS-1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer, lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts D. Hardwood Plywood: BPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of hardwood veneer, lumber or particleboard; type of glue recommended for application. E. Particleboard: ANSI A208. 1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density, with sanded faces. F. Water Resistant Particleboard 1. ANSI A 161.2 and A208. 1, Grade M-2 or M-3, with a 24 hour thickness swell factor of 5 percent or less and a 24 hour water absorption factor of 10 percent or less as tested in conformance with ASTM D 1037. 2. Acceptable Product: Willamette Industries Duraflake WR. G. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. H. Water Resistant Fiberboard 1 . ANSI A 161.2 and A208.2, Grade MD with a 24 hour thickness swell factor of 5 percent or less and a 24 hour water absorption factor of 10 percent or less as tested in conformance with ASTM D1037. 2. Acceptable Product: Sierra Pine Medex. I. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density; surfaced with thermofused melamine. J. Hardboard: ANSI A11315.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side. K. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side; surfaced with thermofused melamine. L. Solid Surfacing Material (SSM) 1. Conformance: ISSFA-2-01. 2. Classification: Veneer Type. 3. Thickness: 1/8 inch thick. 4. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. M. Plastic Laminate 1. Conformance: NEMA LD 3. 2. Grade a. Horizontal Exposed Surfaces: GP-50, 0.50 inch thick. b. Vertical Exposed Surfaces: GP-28, 0.28 inch thick. C. Backing Sheet: BK20, 0.20 inch thick backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 3. Color, Pattern, and Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 03879602 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-3 05/03 N. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. O. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. P. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; Cadmium finish. Q. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. R. Grommets: Two piece plastic, with spring loaded access port equal to Hafele model no. 429.99, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. S. Shelf Standards 1. Cabinet Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04071, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. 2. Wall Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04102, slotted for brackets spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. T. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, Type B04081, chrome satin finish. U. Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, Type B04112, formed steel brackets, chrome satin finish. V. Cabinet Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum wire pull, satin finish, equal to Stanley no. 4484. W. Locker and Sliding Door Pulls: Cast nylon, semi -recessed type equal to Hewi no. 535.75. X. Locks 1. Conformance: BHMA A 156.11 2. Style a. Cabinet Drawers and Doors: Type E07271 for drug storage cabinet in Med rooms and Type E07261 at all other locations. Provide locks with cams not requiring mortising or recessing into cabinet door or drawer front. b. Display Cases: Type E070191. 3. Finish: Satin chrome steel finish. 4. Keying: Master key all drug storage cabinets to one master key. Master. key all other locks to separate master key. Provide two keys per lock. Y. Catches: BHMA A156.9, Type B03141. Z. Slides 1. Standard Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051, with positive stop levers. 2. File Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051 (100 lb. load rated), full extension type with positive stop levers. 3. Cupboard Slides: Equal to Hafele floor mounted pull-out system model no. 421.56.409. with ceiling guide model no. 421.57.406. AA. Hinges: Semi -mortised, self closing, three dimensional adjustable type equal to Grass model no. 1203 screw -on hinge with winged base plate; brushed nickel finish. BB. Sliding Door Track Assemblies 1. Conformance: BHMA A156.9 2. Style a. 1/4 Inch Thick Doors: Type B07063. b. 3/4 Inch Thick Doors: Type B07063. CC. Locker Hooks 1. Ceiling Hooks: Cast aluminum equal to Ives model no. 580. 2. Wall Hooks: Cast aluminum equal to Ives model no. 577. DD: Computer Keyboard Drawer: Equal to MicroComputer model no. MCA 626. EE. Casters: Polyurethane tired, ball bearing, swivel type with integral locking brake, 4 inch diameter with minimum load rating of 500 lbs. per caster, equal to Bassick model no. 4AS8P-7. 03879602 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 4 05/03 2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing: Site finish of casework scheduled to receive opaque and transparent finishes specified in Section 09900. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 2. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts and other exposed and semi -exposed edges with veneer matching face finish as scheduled. Use one piece for full length only. 3. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 4. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide him for scribing and site cutting. 5. Apply plastic Ian-dnate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 6. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 7. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic wood laminate finished surfaces. 8. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. 9. If veneer core plywood drawer sides, backs, and subfronts are used, assemble using dovetail or French dovetail construction. 10. Fabricate drawers with bottoms set into sides, back, and front 1/4 inch. B . Transparent Finish Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with 1AWI Section, Rush overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Particleboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Plain sawn red oak. C. Shelves 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. Thermoset decorative overlay covered particleboard. d. Backs 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar, Alder or 7 ply veneer core plywood. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. g. Drawer Fronts: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. h. Doors: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. i. Door, Drawer and -1 Shelf tdging:'Lumber banding to match door and drawer faces. C. SSM Covered Countertops 1. Fabricate in accordance with SSM manufacturer's written instructions to provide invisible seams. 2. Provide internal and external comers with a minimum of 1/4 inch radius. 03879602 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-5 05/03 2.5 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Finish for items scheduled to receive transparent or opaque finishes, specified in Section 09900 - Painting PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install casework and associated trim in accordance with AWI Section 1700. B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. E. Seal splashes and returns to countertop and wall with type sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. " F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Anchorage Devices 1. General: Use concealed_ anchorage devices at all locations except where otherwise approved by Architect. 2. Transparent or Opaque Finish Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, countersink and putty or countersink and conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL " A. Test substrate at countertops with sinks in conformance with ASTM D1037. B. Provide 2 pieces of substrate to testing laboratory,12 x 12 inch in size taken from sink cutouts. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 03879602 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 6 05/03 I i I SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Loose insulation fill in exterior wall construction. B. Batt insulation on top of lay -in acoustical ceilings. C. Acoustical insulation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Insulation fill in masonry units. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting construction C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction.. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation k Values 1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg. F. 2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with RIC/TINIA 28 1 -1 Conditioning Procedure. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code as indicated on drawings for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 03879602 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1 05/03 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Insulation 1. Owens/Corning Corporation 2. CertainTeed 3. Manville Corp. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 B. Accessories 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation — 1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass or mineral fiber batt. 2. Thermal Resistance: R8. 3. Size: To fit framing spacing 4. Facing: Unfaced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify insulation is dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation without gaps or voids. 3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Place between and tight to framing members. 03879602 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 05/03 C. Exterior Walls 1. Refer to Section 04200 — Unit Masonry. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of roof deck above in all walls where indicated on floor or reflected ceiling plan. 2. Ceilings: Install over top of ceiling in room no's. where indicated on ceiling plan. Install four feet wide over top of partitions separating all rooms and over partitions between all rooms and the corridor. END OF SECTION PR SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. I Sealant and backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 — Steel Doors and Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with steel frames. B. Section 08700 - Hardware: Sealants used in conjunction with hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. D. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated partitions. .�, E. Section 09300 - Tile: Sealants used in conjunction with tile. �Y 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard'printed installation instructions. -� B. Samples 1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements and are suitable for use indicated. 2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic t compounds. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. B, Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five a years documented experience. 03879602 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 �" 05/03 C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation. 1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2 vertical cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece. C. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly down at a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. 5. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled -out portion, failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section. F. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 03879602 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 05/03 — 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements F A 1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet. "x 3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during k' and after installation. "' 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING r, o A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or polysulfide,polymer based elastomencc sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 2. Types a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. B. Latex Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one-part,'nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2. Types a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 b. . S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 03879602 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 05/03 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920. 3) Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant — 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311. _ 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with AAMA 803.3 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. F. Accessories 1. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. — 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D 1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized — 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION -- A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. 03879602 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4.. 05/03 C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193. _ E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for extended period of time. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. L B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.. C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK 4. w A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. tM _ 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 2. Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. k 3. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, ., S-3 or S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 5. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 6. Threshold Bedding: Sealant type: S-8. 7. Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. 8. Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. B. Interior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, or S-2. _ 2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3, or S-4. 3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4. 03879602 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 �•' 05/03 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6. 5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types 5-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or S-7. 6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic tile and joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6. 7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls: Sealant type S-7. END OF SECTION 03879602 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 6 05/03 nee �.: SECTION 08000 DOOR SCHEDULE PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS q A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-General Requirements apply to work of this section. F 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Door Schedule. v.,.n 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. B.Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08700 Hardware. F4 1.4 GENERAL A. This section covers only the doors, frames and hardware as they relate to this project. " Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other appropriate t ' section of the specifications or in the drawings. Refer to the drawings for locations required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS m 2.1 BOOR SCHEDULE A. The DOOR SCHEDULE lists door sizes, types, construction, frame sizes, types, detail locations on drawings, hardware sets and other remarks. k ' B. Existing doors and/or frames listed in the DOOR SCHEDULE are denoted with an `X' in ,+ the schedule. w 2.2 DOORS A. Door types, references by letter designation in the DOOR SCHEDULE, are located at the end of this section. 2.3 REMARKS A. Door schedule remarks. 1. Label (Fire Resistive Rating) a. Ll = 20 minute. b. L2 = 45 minute. C. L3 = 90 minute. 03879602 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 1 05/03 2. Miscellaneous a. M1 = Walnut door in corridor. b. M2 = Coordinate w/ security installation for additional hardware. 03879602 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 2 05/03 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOOR SCHEDULE FRAME DETAILS FLR MARK PR DOOR SIZE TYPE CONST. CONST. SIZE HEAD JAMB SILL REMARKS BASE BID 2 101 1 EXIST X X X X 2 02 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 2 03 3-0x7-0xl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 04 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 LI, M2 2 05 3-Ox7-Ox 13/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 06 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/ A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 07 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 08 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 09 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/ A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 10 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 11 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 12 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/ A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 13 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/ A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 14 3-Ox7-Oxl N A SCTF HM 5 7/8 LI, Ml, M2 2 15 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 LI 2 16 3-Ox7-Oxl Y4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 17 3-00-Oxl N A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 18 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 20 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 2 21 3-Ox7-Oxl N44 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 2 22 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/ A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 23 3-Ox7-Oxl Y4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 26 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 1 27 1 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 28 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 29 3-00-Oxl Y4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 29A 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/ A SCTF I HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 31 EXIST X X X X 2 32 2-Ox7-Oxl 3/ A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 33 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 34 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 03879602 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 3 05/03 £0/SO tb - 00080 FrnGaHDS 'dOOQ Z096L8£0 I'I 8/L S WH AIDS V % IXO-LXO-£ £L Z i'I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ V99 Z I I 8/L S WH AIDS V % iXO-LXO-£ 9g Z 8/L S WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ • J79 Z 11 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c IXO-LXO-£ • £9 Z III 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ Z9 Z III 8/L S WH AIDS V ME IXO-LXO-£ dig Z III 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ 19 Z ZW `iW `i'I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c IXO-LXO-£ • 09 Z X X X X .LSIXg • 09 Z Z# AIOLLdO 8/9 L WH WH V % iXO-LXO-£ OZ i X X AIDS X ISIX9 61 I X X AIDS X ISM 81 i 8/5 L WH WH V Me IxO-LXO-£ • SI I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V Yc IXO-LXO-£ N I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V ME iXO-LXO-£ £i I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ if i 8/L 9 WH AIDS V Ve IxO-LXO-£ OI I 8/L S WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ 60 I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V % iXO-LXO-£ 80 i 8/L S WH AIDS V % IXO-LXO-£ LO I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V ME iXO-LXO-£ 90 I i I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ SO i X wrnd wrnV X ISM • ZO i I# AIOLLdO iW `i I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ ZVI Z iW `II 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ it, Z I'I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c IXO-LXO-£ Ob Z 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ 6£ Z I'I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ L£ Z I'I 8/L S WH AIDS V '/c iXO-LXO-£ 9£ Z I I 8/L 9 WH AIDS V '/c IXO-LXO-£ S£ Z (Ug HSVg S?RIVwaH 'I'IIS mvf QVaI dZIS 'ISMOD ddAl dZIS HOOQ ud Mum wid SMVIHG HNV)I3 FRAME DETAILS FLR MARK PR DOOR SIZE TYPE CONST. CONST. SIZE I HEAD JAMB SILL REMARKS BASE BID OPTION #3 2 65 3-Ox7-Oxl 3/4 A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 68 EXIST X X X X 2 69 EXIST X X X X 2 70 1 3-Ox7-OxI 3/a A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll 2 71 3-Ox7-Oxl3/a A SCTF HM 81/4 Ll 2 1 72 3-Ox7-OxI 3/a A SCTF HM 5 7/8 Ll, Ml, M2 2 74 3-Ox7-Oxl3/a A SCTF HM 81/4 M2 2 75 • EXIST X X X X Ll END OF SECTION 03879602 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 5 05/03 I SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Standard non -rated and fire rated steel doors and frames. B. Custom stainless steel astragals on double doors. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08700 - Hardware. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. E. Section 09250 — Gypsum Drywall: Prepared openings. F. Section 09900 — Painting: Field painting of doors and frames; bituminous coating of frames in contact with cementitious materials. G. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. H. Section 16000 - Electrical connection to activate door hardware. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. C. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings. D. ANSI- A250.7 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement --Application). E. ANSI A250.8/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Frames. F. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and. Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. G. ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. H. ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality. I. ASTM A568 — Carbon and High -Strength Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled, General Requirements. J. ASTM A569 — Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality. 03879602 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1 05/03 K. SDI-113 — Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. L. SDI-117 — Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. M. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. N. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements — 1. Conform to requirements of 36 CFR Part 1191 and Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for fire rated class indicated. B. Manufacturer 1. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate each type door and frame elevation, reinforcements, hardware locations, metal types and gauges, fire rating and finish. Use same numbering system as indicated on drawings. 2. Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings and anchor types. 3. Indicate door core construction and door head and door sill closure method. 4. Indicate cut outs for glazing and louvers, glazing stop and glazing frame profiles and methods of attachment. 5. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Certificates 1. Manufacturer's Certificate certifying that products and fabrications meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION — A. Provide frames with manufacturer's standard sill spreader bar for all welded units. B. Protect doors and frames with manufacturer's standard resilient packaging. 4 C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's five year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Interior Doors and Frames 1. Stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. B. Exterior Doors and Frames and Transoms 1. Stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366 or A620 and ASTM A568. 03879602 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 05/03 C. Protective Coatings 1. Bituminous Coating: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard oven dried, gray alkyd enamel primer, complying with requirements of ANSI A250.10. D. Accessories 1. Jamb Anchors a. Masonry Construction: 7 --strap type, corrugated and galvanized. b. Steel Stud Construction: Z type, same gage and material as frame. 2. Silencers: As specified in Section 08700 - Hardware. 3. Astragals: 18 gage stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 167. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate doors and frames to sizes and profiles indicated and in conformance with, except as otherwise specified, SDI-113, for non -rated assemblies and NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies. 2. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcements in accordance with Table 4 of ANSI A250.8. Weld at] hardware reinforcement plates in place. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for frames set in masonry. 4. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. 5. Provide face welded frames with temporary steel spreader bars. f 6. Grind all welds smooth, fill all voids with body putty and seam filler and sand smooth. Welds and joints shall not be visible. a ' B. Doors i 1. Exterior doors: Level 3 , Model 2. 2. Close top edge of doors with flush steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. 3. Close bottom edge of doors with inverted steel channel closure. 4. Door Edges: Square. 5. Core Construction, Exterior Doors a. Full thickness polystyrene or polyurethane core permanently bonded to face sheets with manufacturer's standard adhesive. b. Thermal Value: Total U-Value of .15 (RSI value of 0.42), measured in _. accordance with ASTM C236. C. Frames 1. Exterior Non -Security Frames: Level 3, 14 gage. 2. Interior Non -Security Frames: Level 2, 16 gage, STC 38. 3. Fabricate and assemble as complete welded unit. 4. Weld Z and U anchors to frame. 5. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. 6. Prepare interior frame for silencers except where scheduled to receive sound seals or weatherstripping. Provide for three single silencers on strike side of single doors and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. 7. Provide minimum 14 gage steel floor angle clips welded to each jamb. D. Astragals 1. Fabricate to shape as detailed. w. 03879602 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 �"" 05/03 2.3 FINISH A. Finish: As Specified in SECTION - 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION _ 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement. _ 3. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch where in direct contact with masonry. 4. In masonry openings, provide an adjustable T-strap anchor at each hinge location and at same location in strike jamb. 5. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 6. Install field applied hardware in accordance with SDI-109. , 7. Touch-up damaged shop finishes. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to comer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary spreader bars and welds. Grind and repair frame as required to provide a smooth paint finish. B. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 08000 DOOR SCHEDULE. END OF SECTION 03879602 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 05/03 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive transparent finish. .+ B. Cut outs for glass panels. C. Metal door lite surround frames. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. E. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing. 2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; factory machining criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 1. Indicate special installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of NWWDA standards referenced. 2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A for Flush Wood Doors. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03879602 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 '° 05/03 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging. C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Exterior Doors: Life of Installation. 2. Interior Doors: Life of Installation. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Doors 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, WI. 2. Eggers Industries, Inc.; Two Rivers, WI. 3. VT Industries, Inc.; Holstein, IA. 4. Weyerhaeuser; Marshfield, WI. B. Door Lite Surround Frames 1. Air Louvers, Inc.; Pico Rivera, CA. 2. Anemostat Door Products; Carson, CA. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03879602 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 05/03 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber 1. Transparent Finish: a. NHLA first grade, plain sawn Red Oak kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. b. NHLA first grade, Walnut kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. All corridors to be walnut to match existing. B. Cores 1. Solid Core a. Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1.; grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. b. Fire Rated 1) 20 and 30 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. 2. Hollow Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic impregnated honeycomb corrugated fiberboard. C. Veneers 1. Transparent Finish:.050 inch thick, NWWDA, A grade Red Oak, Walnut at corridor species wood, plain sliced. doors, spec D. Glazing Stops 1. Aluminum shape as detailed, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper ` proof screws; designed to conform to UL requirements. E. Adhesives 1. Interior Doors: Type U - water resistant. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate fire rated doors to meet fire ratings scheduled in accordance with ASTM E84 ,.., classifications for flame spread/smoke developed of 20/45. Attach fire rating label to + door edge. 2. Fabricate doors to thickness scheduled. 3. Veneer Match a. ' Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip Match. b. Assembly on Door Face: Running Match. C. On Pairs of Doors: Pair Match. d. On Door/Transom Panel: End Match. 4. Hardware a. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with templates furnished by hardware supplier at locations indicated in NWWDA I.S.1.7-87 - Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. b. Do not machine for surface hardware. C. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. ,i d. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Stainless steel T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors. 5. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings with prefit clearances specified in NWWDA I.S. 1-A. 03879602 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 05/03 B. Flush Face Doors 1. Solid Core: Fabricate in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1 and 1-A for 5 ply construction except as otherwise specified, with finish as scheduled. 2. Bonding a. Mineral Cores: Type A - bonded. 2.4 FINISH A. As specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. Use threaded through bolts. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and hardware specified in Section 08700. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Telegraphing: 1/10 inch measured with straight edge in any three inch span. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, comer to comer, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 03879602 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 05/03 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames B. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors ^" 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications «* I. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type required by NFPA. C. Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing laboratory approved by code authority having jurisdiction. d. Provide hardware tested in accordance with NFPA 252. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Texas Civil Statutes, Article 9102, Architectural Barriers Act, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 1. TAS 4.13.8 Door Thresholds 2. TAS 4.13.9 Door Hardware 3. TAS 4.13.10 Door Closers 1.6 SUBMITTALS �- A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. x 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 1 05/03 3. Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically controlled devices. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI/BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI/BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. 4. Include master cross-reference list indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and associated hardware set. a. If, for any reason, any door is moved from the set indicated in the schedule at the end of this section, provide a master cross-reference list in numerical sequence indicating door number, original hardware set and new hardware set for every opening. C. Keying Schedule 1. Hold a keying conference with the Owner to develop a keying schedule. 2. Develop schedule in accordance with DHI-03. 3. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. 4. Unless otherwise indicated or requested, provide keying as follows: a. Key all doors different and key all doors to the same room alike. b. Key all exterior doors alike. C. Master key all doors except mechanical room doors to one key. d. Key mechanical room doors to existing utilities master key system. D. Certificates of Compliance 1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA and ANSI/ BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Provide list of actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 3. Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements adjustment methods and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Furnish spare parts data, including a complete list of parts and supplies and source of supply, for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electromagnetic closer holder release devices. 5. Submit special tools required for hardware adjustment or control. 6. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. 7. Submit simplified "as installed" diagrams for electronic locking devices and electromagnetic closer holder release devices. 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 2 05/03 r r.: 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. .'* 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement w ; required, size of holes, and similar details. 1.9 WARRANTY i. A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Blank keys: Provide one for each lock scheduled. B. Provide 10 extra cylinder cores for each master key group. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges 1. Bommer; Landrum, SC 2. Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO .w 3. McKinney Manufacturing Co.; Scranton, PA 4. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works; New Britain, CT B. Lock and Latches 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; City of Industry, CA 2. Best Lock Corporation; Indianapolis, IN 3. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT "^ 4. PDQ Industries, Inc.; Leola, PA 5. Sargent Division, ESSEX Industries, Inc.; New Haven, CT 6. Schlage Lock Co.; San Francisco, CA C. Push/Pulls 1. Elmes Door Hardware, Teramura International Corporation; Torrance, CA. 2. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO �- 3. Rockwood Manufacturing Co.; Rockwood, PA 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA D. Electromagnetic Locks 1. Adams Rite; Pomona, CA 2. Loknetics Security Engineering; Forestville, CT 3. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN ear e. 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 3 05/03 y. E. Exit Devices 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC 3. Sargent Division ESSEX Industries Inc.; New Haven, CT 4. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN F. Closers L Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.; Princeton, IL 3. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC G. Overhead Holders 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Rixson Architectural Hardware; Charlotte, NC H. Manual and Automatic Bolts 1. Door Controls International (DCI); Dexter, MI 2. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co; Wallingford, CT 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA I. Gasketing/Threshholds 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; Memphis, TN 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc.; Rosemount, MO 4. Zero International, Inc.; Bronx, NY J. Protection Plates 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.; Temple, TX 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA K. Door Stops/Bumpers 1. Elmes Door Hardware, Teramura International Corporation; Torrance, CA. 2. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 3. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 4. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 5. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA L. Door Silencers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA M. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. General 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section. 2. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Schlage, LCN, Hager, Pemko, and Triangle Brass. Components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the ANSI/BHMA standards for Grade 1 products and are listed in the latest edition of the BHMA Directories of certification. 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 4 05/03 - I B. C. [a 3. Regardless of whether or not the HARDARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories 1. General a. Provide dust proof floor strikes for vertical rod devices. b. Provide manufacturer's standard filler to extend exit device beyond door lite frames where door lites extend below exit device. Factory cut or form filler to match profile of exit device trim. Closers 1. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. 2. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. 3. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. 4. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90-degree open position. 5. Operating Pressure: Provide closers with maximum operating pressure as follows: a. Interior Doors: Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle. b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds. C. Fire Rated Doors: Set to minimum required to relatch door. Miscellaneous 1. Metal Thresholds a. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolts and exit devices. b. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated, beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch. Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch. E. Accessories, 1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. F. Fastenings 1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Concrete or Grout Filled Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields. 3. Hollow Masonry: Provide resin filled screen anchors equal to Hilti C7 anchors. 4. Gypsum oaid - derlin expansion anchors equal to Hild Gyps Willb Provide nylon or gTogglers". Oft 5. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 6. Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full surface hinges. G. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. H. Finishes 1 Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI A156.18 as follows: a. Hinges: BHMA 626. b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626. k. 03879602 HARDWARE 08700-5 05/03 C. Door closers: BHMA 630 or BHMA 691. d. Miscellaneous hardware: Finish appearance to match door hardware. e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: Finish appearance to match door hardware. f. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware. 1. Keying 1. Provide an extension of existing keying system. — 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. 3. Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard construction key system. 4. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved means. 5. Supply keys in following quantities: a. 2 keys for each lock. b. 3 master keys. C. 6 construction keys. d. 2 control keys. 6. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in a container for key control system storage in sets or subsets as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General ^ 1. Locate in accordance with DIE 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DIE Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Install in accordance with DHI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. 5. Conform to. Texas Accessibility Standards for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. C. Armor, Kick and Mop Plates 1. Armor Plates: Where scheduled, install on push side of single -acting doors and on both sides of double-acting doors. 2. Kick Plates: Where scheduled, install on push side of single -acting doors and on both sides of double-acting doors. 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 6 05/03 3. Mop Plates a. Where scheduled, install on pull side of single -acting doors where door is scheduled to receive armor or kick plate. b. Where scheduled, install on pull side of single -acting doors where door not scheduled to receive armor or kick plate. •* D. Auxiliary Hardware R 1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors. 2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt E. Thresholds w 1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping. 3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions. t F. Weatherseals 1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. 2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position. 3. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer. G. Gasketing 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. ' H. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install, in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE BASE BID HW-1 ' Opening No's 204, 214 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea By others Cylinder 1 ea By others Rim Panic Device 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SUM AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 7 05/03 HW-2 Opening No's 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 215, 216, 217, 222, 223, 227, 228, 229, 229A, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 239, 240 Each opening to have: - 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Lockset D50RD 626 — 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 HW-3 Opening No's . 205, 218, 226, 232 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Latchset DIOS 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL — 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 HW-4 Opening No's 220,221 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage D72RD 626 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 HW-5 Opening No's 241, 242 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage D10S 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 8 05/03 :. HW-6 „u Opening No's 203 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Von Duprin Cylinder 3215 626 1 ea Von Duprin Rim Panic Device 35Lx06 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SUB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 OPTION NO. 1 HW-7 Opening No's 106, 107, 108, 109 ^ Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Lockset D50RD 626 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 HW-8 Opening No's 105, 111, 113 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 �., 1 ea Schlage Lever Lockset D70RD 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 :.r HW-9 Opening No's 114 Each opening to have: rK 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Latchset D40S 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL I ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 9 °' 05/03 HW-10 Opening No's 110 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lockset D76RD 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 HW-11 Opening No's 115,120 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lockset D91RD 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 OPTION NO.2 HW-12 Opening No's 263, 264 Each opening to have: 6 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 2 ez Von Duprin Cylinder 3215 626 2 ea Von Duprin Rim Panic Device 35Lx06 626 1 ea Removable Mullion 2 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 2 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 4 ea Hager Silencers 307D 630 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 10 05/03 HW-13 Opening No's 260 Each opening to have: 6 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 2 ez By others Cylinder 626 2 ea By others Rim Panic Device w/ LVR 626 1 ea By others Removable Mullion 2 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 2 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 4 ea Hager Silencers 307D 630 1 ea Astragal 626 Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer HW-14 Opening No's 261, 266, 266A, 273 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Lockset D50RD 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 ** 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 HW-15 -Opening No's 261A Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Lockset D70RD 626 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 a- 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 A:..a k 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 11 05/03 HW-16 Opening No's 262 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Lockset D70RD 626 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL — 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 OPTION NO. 3 HW-17 Opening No's 272 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea By others Cylinder 1 ea By others Rim Panic Device w/ LVR 1 ea LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer HW-18 Opening No's 265 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Von Duprin Cylinder 3215 626 1 ea Von Duprin Panic Device 35Lx06 626 _ Closer 4111 EDA x 1 ea LCN SMB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 03879602 HARDWARE 08700 - 12 05/03 I HW-19 OpeningNo's 270,271,274 Each opening to have: 3 ea Hager Butts BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 626 1 ea Schlage Lever Lockset D50RD 626 Closer 4111 EDA x I ea LCN SNIB AL 1 ea Hager Stop 236W 626 1 set Hager Silencers 307D 630 0 END OF SECTION 03879602 HARDWARE 08700-13 05/03 1 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS k- A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation. B. Glass for hollow metal frame work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Hollow Metal Frames. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data FPO, 1. Glass: a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. b. Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials and methods. C. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. t ' B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual and GANA Lan -dnators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 4 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS ow t ; A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. «, 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to „* adjacent Work. 03879602 GLAZING 08800 - 1 05/03 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Glass Materials 1. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. 4. Viracon. B. Glazing Compounds 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Norton Co. 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Tremco Mfg. Co. 6. VIP Enterprises, Inc. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glazing 1. G 1 - Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type H - Wired Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Translucent; Form 1; Quality q8 glazing; Mesh, ml - Diamond; conforming to ANSI Z79.1, thickness as noted on drawings. B. Glazing Accessories 1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. 2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. 3. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Resilient type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished with extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; —' black color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 03879602 GLAZING 08800 - 2 05/03 — J l < 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. k B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 2. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. . 4. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and k- glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 5. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. 6. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. B. Interior Glazing �+ 1. Dry Method (Preformed Gaskets) a. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. b. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at comers to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. C. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. d. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. e. Install wedge gasket with sufficient pressure to attain full contact of gasket on opposite side of glazing. r- 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and mirrors. 7: 03879602 GLAZING 08800 - 3 05/03 F 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an X'by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 03879602 GLAZING 08800 - 4 05/03 o. PART 1-GENERAL SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS MW A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal furring and lathing. B. Portland cement plaster system. C. Sprayed surface finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal Studding and Framing. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Applied surface finish. D. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. B. ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime. C. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. D. ASTM C631 - Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering. E. ASTM C847 - Metal Lath. t F. ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters. G. ASTM,C926 - Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster. H. ASTM C933 - Welded Wire Lath. G,- I. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.33 inches to 0.112 inches in thickness. J. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. K. ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement -Based Plaster. L. ASTM C1085 - Butyl Rubber - Based Solvent - Release Sealants. . M. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. N. ASTM E119 - Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. O. FM - 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. P. NTMA - National Tile and Marble Association. Q. PCA (Portland Cement Association) - Plaster (Stucco) Manual. R. UL -Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. 03879602 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 o 05/03 p. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 1/360 deflection under superimposed dead load and wind uplift loads. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data 1. Provide product data on furring, lathing components, structural characteristics, plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lather 1. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1063. B. Plasterer 1. Company specializing in cement plaster work with 5 years documented experience. 2. Apply cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor more than 80 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of plaster and until cured. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bonding Agents 1. Dayton Superior, Corp; Oregon, IL. 2. Larson Products, Corp.; Jessup, Maryland. 3. Laticrete International, Inc. B. Finish Stucco 1. El Rey Stucco Co., Inc.; Albuquerque, NM. 2. La Habra Products, Inc.; Anaheim, CA. 3. United States Gypsum; Chicago, IL. C. Moldings 1. Delta Star (Superior Metal), Inc.; San Carlos, CA. 2. Fry Reglet Corp.; Alpharetta, GA. 3. MM Systems Corp.; Tucker, GA. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03879602 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 05/03 2.2 MATERIALS A. Main Ceiling Channels: ASTM C1063, hot or cold rolled steel; G-60, hot dipped galvanized coating; 3/4 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch high, length as required. B. Furring Channels: ASTM C1063, hot or cold rolled steel; G-60, hot dipped galvanized coating, . 3/8 inch deep x 3/4 inch high; length as required. C. Hangers: ASTM C 1063, Galvanized steel, of size to suit application, to rigidly support ceiling components in place, to deflection limits as indicated. D. Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, rust inhibitive paint finish; minimum 16 gage thick; size and ` length as required. E. Metal Lath: ASTM C847; Galvanized, self furring mesh; of weight to suit application. F. Moldings 1. Material: Formed zinc minimum 26 gage thick. 2. Depth: Governed by plaster thickness. 3. Lengths: Maximum possible lengths. 4. Flanges: Perforated flanges. 5. Edges: Square. G. Comer Mesh: Formed zinc, Extruded, minimum 26 gage thick; perforated flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide; galvanized finish. H. Anchorage Methods: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place. L Cement: ASTM C150, Type I Portland ASTM C91. J. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S. K. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897. L. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. 4' M. Cement: As specified for plaster base coat. N. Lime: As specified for plaster base coat. O. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. PART 3 - EXECUTION ° 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces and site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install lathing and furring for Portland cement plaster work in accordance with ASTM ^* C1063 and the following: B. Soffit Framing 1. Securely anchor hangers to structural members. *� 2. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. R 3. Size and space hangers in conformance with ASTM C1063, Table 1 to achieve deflection limits indicated. 4. Install furring to match existing height after above ceiling work is complete. 5. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full load to hangers. 03879602 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 05/03 C. Lathing 1. Apply one ply of underlayment over substrate; weather lap edges 4 inches minimum. Fasten in place. 2. Apply self furring reinforcement with self furring ribs perpendicular to supports. 3. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. 4. Attach metal lath to metal soffit framing in accordance with ASTM C1063. Space attachments at maximum 6 inches on center. D. Accessories 1. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in place. 2. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. 3.3 PLASTERING A. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION 03879602 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 05/03 loft SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Framing accessories. D. Acoustical insulation. E. Acoustical sealant. F. Gypsum board. G. Cementitious backer board. H. Taped and sanded joint treatment. I. Texture finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing. B. Section 05810 - Expansion Joint Assemblies: Expansion Joints. C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted accessories specified in other sections. D. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Acoustical insulation. E. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Fire -resistive -rated joint sealants. F. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. G. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster. H. Section 09300 - Tile. I. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A118.9 - Cementitious Backer Units B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. C. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. D. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and r•s Manufactured Housing. G. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board. H. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. �f 03879602 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1 �'" 05/03 I. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. J. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. K. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. L. ASTM C1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. M. ASTM C1311 - Solvent -Release Sealants. N. ASTM D3678 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Interior Profile Extrusions. O. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. P. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. Q. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. R. ASTM E497 - Installing Sound -Isolating Lightweight Partitions. S. ASTM El190 - Strength of Power -Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. T. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. U. FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C) - Pin, Drive Guided and Pin Driver, Powder Actuated (Fasteners for Powder Actuated and Hand Actuated Fastening Tools). V. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. W. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. X. UL Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. Y. WHI - Certification Listings. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: STC 55 in accordance with ASTM E90. B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. C. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: 1. Exterior Non -Axial Load Bearing Components a. Maximum Deflection: L/600 at 20 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interior Partitions a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. b. Maximum Deflection: 1J120 at 5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 7.51bf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. d. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 10 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of L/240 and deadload of 5 lbf per sq. ft. minimum, spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 03879602 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 2 05/03 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01330: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with acoustical seals. 2. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape and joint compounds. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE oRr A. Qualifications 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to IBC 2000 code for fire rated assemblies as follows: a. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL: See Partition Schedule. C. Material Compatibility 1. Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal comer beads and trim. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Room Temperatures a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. 03879602 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-3 05/03 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Studs 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Dale Industries 3. Unitech 4. Dietrich 5. Alabama Metals Corp. 6. Celotex Building Products 7. G-P Gypsum Corp. -4 8. National Gypsum Co. 9. United States Gypsum Co. B. Gypsum Board 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products ' 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. C. Insulation 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. D. Sheathing Tape 1. W.R. Grace -- 2. Protecto Wrap Co.; Denver CO. E. Accessories 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. �. 5. United States Gypsum Co. F. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Framing 1. Interior Studs and Tracks a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 20 gage thick (unless otherwise specified or required by partition height for loading specified), C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. b. To receive Plaster: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 22 gage thick unless otherwise indicated, C shape, with knurled faces. 2. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. 3. Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, rust inhibitive coating. 4. Exterior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 525 G-60, hot dipped galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and where indicated. 03879602 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 4 05/03 .•w µ 5. Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs offset 5/8 inch at the midpoint. Track equal to "Shadowline" design by Fire Track. B. Gypsum Board 1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; p pe ends square cut, square edges. ,►•� 3. Cementitious Backing Board: High density, glass fiber reinforced, 5/8 inch (nominal) thick. C. Accessories 1. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed mineral fiber, friction fit, Type I unfaced, thickness as indicated. 2. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C 1311; Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; black in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's standard in exposed locations. 3. Trim: a. Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces; 1-1/4 inch wide flanges. b. Edge Trim: ASTM C 1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as indicated. 4. Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated -arm type, adjustable, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. 5. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 6. Wall Texture: Latex based non -aggregated texturing material. 7. Cementitious Backing Board Tape: Manufacturer's standard 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 8. Fasteners a. Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. b. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C), size and type recommended by framing manufacturer. ., C. Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments. d. Gypsum Board to Metal Framing 1) Screws complying with ASTM C954; type as required for substrate indicated. 2) Adhesive: ASTM C557. 9. Tie and Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as r. determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. 03879602 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5 '""� 05/03 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Studs 1. General a. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. b. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center (regardless of fire rated partition allowances for wider spacings unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form all corners and intersections using conventional three stud framing. 3. Interior Partition a. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling bracing and for partitions extending through the ceiling structure above. b. Non -Fire Rated Partitions: Brace partitions, extending above ceiling only, with runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof or floor deck above and space alternately at 4 feet on center maximum. C. Fire Rated Partitions 1) Where open web steel joints are used as the framing members. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 2) Provide deflection track at head of all full height partitions and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3) Frame all sides of openings for ducts of any size. f 4) Frame all sides of openings for fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers in accordance with damper manufacturer's listed assembly. 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 5. Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of finish carpentry items, plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware. 6. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. B. Acoustical Accessories 1. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind r and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 2. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with ASTM C919, ASTM E497, and manufacturer's instructions. 3. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work and rough -in boxes in conformance with ASTM E497. 03879602 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 6 05/03 F� C. Gypsum Board 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 5. Control Joints a. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required by ASTM C840. b. Install control joints centered above each jamb of all door frames. Extend control joint from top of frame head to top of partition. 6. Place comer beads at all exposed external comers. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed locations. Leave a 1/4 inch space between edge trim and dissimilar material. Seal joint with sealant specified in Section 07900. D. Joint Treatment 1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section. 2. Cementitious Backing Board: Tape joints and comers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Texture Finish 1. Walls: Roller apply finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces scheduled to receive paint. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings. B. Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile, and behind fixed millwork. C. Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint. END OF SECTION 03879602 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250-7 WIN 05/03 SECTION 09300 TILE • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS t ' A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic mosaic tile floor finish using the thinset application method. B. Mortar bed installation. C. Ceramic tile walls,wainscot, and base finish using the thinset application method. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Trowelling of floor slab for tile application. Floating of ^. floor slab for mortar bed. B. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Control joint components. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Cementitious backer unit and gypsum wallboard substrate. D. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. E. Division 15 Section - Sanitary Drainage and Vent Systems: Floor drains. ,,r•. 1.4 SUBMITTALS a A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, and setting details. 2. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives and grouts. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 4. Submit maintenance data including recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, cleaning materials, and polishes and waxes. a. B. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years experience. 2. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1 Polk B. Installer Qualifications ` 1. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 03879602 TILE 09300 - 1 "?; 05/03 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with Section 01600. B. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. - C. Store bagged materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather. D. Store tile in manner to prevent scratching, chipping and breaking. E. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS _ A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F. during installation of mortar materials. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide approximately 4% maintenance materials of each tile specified to the Owner at location `- as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tile 1. American Marrazzi, Tile, Inc. 2. American Olean Tile Co. 3. Crossville Ceramics. 4. Dal -Tile Corp. 5. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. 6. Monarch Tile, Inc. 7. Summitville Tiles, Inc. B. Tile Setting and Grouting Materials 1. American Olean Tile Co. 2. Custom Building Products. 3. Dal -Tile Corp. 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. Mapei Corporation. 6. Summitville Tiles, Inc. C. Waterproofing Membrane 1. Compotite Corporation. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Tile _ 1. Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A137.1. b. Type: Vitreous or porcelain with moisture absorption of 0 to 0.5 percent. TILE 09300 - 2 03879602 05/03 C. Size: Mixture to match existing. d. Pattern: To match existing. e. Edge: Match existing. f. Surface Finish: Unglazed. g. Color: Blend using a maximum of 3 colors and varying percentages to match "+ existing. h. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C1028; not less than .60 wet and .80 dry. 2. Ceramic Floor Tile a. Conformance: ANSUTCA A 137.1 b. Type: Vitreous with moisture absorption of 0 to 0.5 percent. C. Size: 4 1/4 x 4 1/4 x 1/4 inch. d. Pattern: As scheduled. e. Edge: Cushioned. f. Surface Finish: Unglazed. g. Color: As scheduled. h. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C1028; not less than .60 wet and dry. 3. Ceramic Wall and Ceiling Tile a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A 137. Ink b. Type: Non -vitreous with moisture absorption over 7.0 percent. C. Size: 4 1/4 x 4 1/4 x 1/4 inch. d. Edge: Cushioned. e. Surface Finish: Matte glazed. f. Color: As scheduled. 4. Base a. At Mosaic Tile Floors: Match wall tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, size and color; 4 1/4 inches high; coved bottom and internal corner. 5. Trim Shapes: Surface caps, comers and miscellaneous pieces to match adjacent tile surface. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI/TCA A136.1, Type 1; thinset bond type. C. Thinset Mortar: ANSI/TCA Al 18.4; Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water. �., D. Grout 1. Type: Pre -mixed cementitious with latex additive. 2. Colors a. Floors: Manufacturer's color as selected by Architect. fi<,6 b. Walls and Ceilings: Color as selected by Architect. E. Mortar Bed 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I. 2. Sand: ASTM C-144. 3. Water: Potable. ` 2.3 MIXES A. Mortar Bed 1. Mix 1 part Portland Cement to 6 parts damp sand by volume. 2. Add minimum amount of water to produce workable consistency. B. Thinset and Grout +** 1. Mix and proportion pre -mix bond coat and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 03879602 TILE 09300 - 3 ^-k 05/03 J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that surfaces are plumb and level and have square corners with the following maximum variation: y 1. Subfloor Surfaces: 1/8 inch from true flat in 10 feet with no abrupt, irregularities greater than 1/32 inch. 2. Vertical Surfaces: a. Deviation from plumb: 1/8 inch in 8 feet. b. Deviation from alignment: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Apply conditioner to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install adhesive, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Lay floor, wall, and ceiling tile in grid pattern centered in both directions in each space or on each wall area. - 3. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 4. Place edge strips at exposed tile edges in floors. 5. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. 6. Form corners and bases neatly. 7. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 8. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting 9. Grout tile joints and damp cure for minimum of 72 hours after installation. - 10. Apply sealant to junction of file and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. B. Expansion Control Joints 1. Provide joints where indicated on the drawings, and if not indicated, provide in conformance with TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2. Keep expansion and control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. 3. Seal joint with sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Mortar Bed 1. Install cleavage membrane. 2. Apply mortar bed over cleavage membrane to a thickness as indicated on the drawings. 3. Use mortar within 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing. 4. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set. D. Floor Tile 1. Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number F113. 03879602 TILE 09300 - 4 05/03 t._.v E. Wall Tile 1. Over masonry walls, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 to match existing. 2. Over cementitious backer units, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number W244. 3. Over gypsum wallboard, install in accordance with ANSI 108-4 and TCA Handbook number W242. F. Ceiling Tile 1. Over cementitious backer units, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number C312. G. Evidence Drying Chamber 1. Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook B415. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Install tile with the following variation from true flatness: r 1. 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 2. From edge of tile to edge of adjacent tile: 1/32 inch. B. Install grout with the following variation from flush with tile surface: 1. Maximum 3/64 inch for inch wide joint. 2. Maximum 1/16 inch for 3/8 inch wide joint. *! 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound tile after setting. B. Replace hollow sounding units. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Wash tile thoroughly to remove all residue. B. Use of acid in cleaning solutions is prohibited. C. Replace all broken chipped or otherwise damaged tile. D. Remove and replace tiles that do not conform to specked tolerances. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for minimum of seven days after installation. t END OF SECTION 03879602 TILE 09300 - 5 ,�., 05/03 PON SECTION 09510 �" ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. ;o 1, 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. * , B. Acoustical tile. C. Non -fire rated assemblies. D. Perimeter trim. E. Replacement of acoustical units in existing grid system. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 07210 -Building Insulation: Acoustical Insulation over Acoustical Ceilings. B. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. .+ C. Section 13851 — Fire Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system. D. Section 15932 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. E. Section 16515 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. IL 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B. ASTM C635 - Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. C. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in - Panels. D. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ' E. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. F. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. ASTM E580 - Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. H. ASTM El111 Measuring the Interzone Altenuation of Ceiling Systems. I. ASTM E1414 Airborne Sound Altenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. J. ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products r� K. CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. L. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Fire Resistance Directory, System Ratings. M. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory. 03879602 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -1 05/03 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to IBC 2000 code for combustibility requirements for materials. B. Provide acoustical tile with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Class I, 0-25. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. C. Identify acoustical tile with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting J organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data 1. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. C. Samples 1. Upon request, submit four samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. 2. Upon request, submit four samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation. 1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B.. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 9 03879602 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 05/03 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 4 boxes of each type acoustical ceiling unit specified to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Armstrong World Industries; Lancaster, PA B. Celotex Building Products; Tampa, FL C. USG Interiors; Chicago, IL D. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Suspension Systems 1. Grid - Type C 1. a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non -fire rated. b. Type: Exposed T. C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. d. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 2. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. B. Touch-up Paint: Acoustical Unit manufacturer's standard type and color to match acoustic and grid units. C. Attachment Devices 1. Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, 'Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchors in Concrete a. Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1) Type: Post -installed expansion anchors. 2) Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. 3) Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 3. Wire Hangers, Braces and Ties: a. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. b. Size: Select wire diameter, so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.016 inch diameter wire. 03879602 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 3 05/03 TM. , D. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. E. Acoustic Units 1. Conformance: ASTM E1264. 2. Type C Units _ a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III. d. Form: 2. e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent. f. NRC Range:.55 - .65. g. CAC Range: Minimum 35. h. Fire Hazard Classification: None. i. Edge Detail: Square. j. Surface Color: White. k. Pattern: C. 1. Acceptable Product: Armstrong Fine Fissured 1729. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Extend existing acoustical ceiling installations using materials and methods as specified. B. Clean and repair existing acoustical ceilings which remain or are to be reinstalled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 5. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 6. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 7. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan. 03879602 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 4 05/03 8. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 9. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; a.r or support components independently. 10. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. FM B. Acoustic Units 1. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Lay units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. 3. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. 4. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist and warp. .+ 5. Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 'y 6. Cutting Acoustic Units a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. ,., b. Cut edges to field cut units. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. t-A B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. rye:. 3.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide four full cartons extra quantity of each type acoustic units specified to Owner at location designated. 03879602 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 5 05/03 No Text r r SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1- GENERAL �w 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers: Cove trim sealant. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Wall materials to receive base. C. Section 09680 — Carpet - Glue Down: Termination edging of adjacent floor finish. D. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.5 F41 Conform to applicable code as indicated on drawings for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648. 2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450, per ASTM E662. 3. Wall base: Flame spread maximum 75, smoke developed maximum 450 per ASTM E84. SUBMITTALS &.; A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide seaming plan for sheet vinyl flooring. B. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available. C. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. D. Samples 1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial color selection. 2. Submit one sample 12 x 12 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. 3. Submit four samples 12 inches long for each base and stair material. E. Closeout Submittals t 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested „ methods and schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. 03879602 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 1 05/03 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one box of each color of tile and 50 lineal feet of base and stair materials of each material specified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Resilient Tile Flooring 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Tarkett, Inc., Parsippany, NJ. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 4. Azrock Industries, Inc., San Antonio, TX. B. Resilient Base 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Johnson Rubber Company, Middlefield, OH. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 4. Mercer Products Co., Inc., Orlando, FL. 5. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Akron, OH. 6. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, OH. C. Accessories: As recommended by flooring manufacturer. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile ASTM F1066; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick. 1. Conformance: ASTM F1066, Class 2. 2. Size: 12 x 12 x 1/8 inch thick. 3. Color/Pattern: Color and pattern through total thickness. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color series. 03879602 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 05/03 09650 - 2 I B. Base 1. Size: 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; colors as selected by Architect. 2. Length: Roll. 3. Accessories: Premolded end stops and external corners, of same material, size, and color as base. n C. Accessories 1. Subfloor Filler: Premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. 2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. 4. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION . A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. _.. C. Verify that concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content as recommended by manufacturer as follows: r 1. Prior to installation of any resilient flooring, conduct quantitative moisture emissions tests in accordance with Rubber Manufacturers Association Guidelines. 2. Maximum Allowable Moisture Content: 3 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. 3. Test Quantities: Minimum of 4 tests for areas up to 5,000 sq. ft. and one additional test for each additional 5,000 sq. ft. of floor area. 4. After concrete floor surfaces have been cleaned, spread small patches of adhesive to be in several locations in each room and allowed to dry overnight. 5. If the adhesive can be peeled easily from the floor surfaces, the floor is not sufficiently dry 6. Apply resilient flooring when tests show that the adhesive adheres tightly to the floor surface, 7. If concrete floors are in contact with the ground or over unventilated crawl spaces, use small patches of primer in lieu of adhesive to test for moisture. D. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances, that may impair adhesion of new - adhesive and finish materials. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION !"' A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. r B. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. "? D. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. E. Vacuum clean substrate. F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. 03879602 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 3 "� 05/03 3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Extend existing resilient flooring installations using materials and methods compatible with " existing installations, or as specified. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 2. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion 3. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. 4. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Secure resilient strips by adhesive. 5. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. B. Tile Flooring 1. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed. 2. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. C. Base 1. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. 2. Miter internal corners. 3. At external corners, use premolded units. 4. At exposed ends, use premolded units. 5. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 6. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Subfloor Flatness: Maximum 1/8 inch deviation in 10 feet. B. Vertical Alignment (Offset from edge of file to edge of tile): None allowed. C. Horizontal Alignment (Offset from a straight line): Plus or minus 1/16 inch in any length. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Protecting installed construction. B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION 03879602 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 4 05/03 i SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue down carpet. B. Adhesives, floor fillers, edge strips and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 — Resilient Flooring and Base: Base finish. B. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet. 2. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance p* characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. ' B. Closeout Submittals ,.. 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested methods and schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. C. Samples 1. Submit one sample 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in woven carpet with ten years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable UBC and NFPA 101 code as indicated on drawings for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648 and NFPA 253. 2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450 per ASTM E662. A, 3. Surface Flammability Ignition: Conform to ASTM D2859. 03879602 CARPETING 09680'- 1 �"° 05/03 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during and 24 hours after installation of materials. C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 3 days after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet 1. Collins and Aikman, Explorer. 2. Mohawk, Enterprise II. B. Sub -floor Filler 1. W.W. Henry Co., Huntington Park, CA. C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Carpet 1. Vinyl block multi -color textured loop, direct glue down. B. Accessories 1. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Primers and Adhesives a. Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Vinyl type, smooth finish, color as selected from manufacturer's standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive work. 1. Measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot-long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 1/8 inch. 2. Deviation from edge of construction; control or expansion joint to adjacent edge: No deviation allowed. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative carbonization, or dusting. C. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 03879602 CARPETING 09680 - 2 05/03 x; 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval. B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. C. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. D. Locate seams in area of least traffic. E. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. F. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction, or as directed by manufacturer, for anticipated traffic. G. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. H. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. I. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. J. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. K. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and CRI 104 Section 8 Direct Glue -Down Installation. 1. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. 2. Apply seam adhesive. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. 3. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. L. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. 3.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 120 sq ft of carpeting in each color/pattern as specified. Deliver to Owner as directed. END OF SECTION 03879602 CARPETING 09680 - 3 05/03 SECTION 09900 PAINTING •� PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board Systems: Texture on gypsum wallboard surfaces. B. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. C. Section 15391 — Marking and Identification: Color schedule for equipment and piping. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE r A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish Y` products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for flame spread/smoke development rating requirements for finishes of 0-25/0-450. a . 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on all finishing products. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection. C. Certificates w; 1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following: a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide. •-► b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide. C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 1 "^ 05/03 d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of 90 degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.9 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated. B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ICI Paint Stores, Cleveland, OH. B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA. C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 2 05/03 i B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Stripping Agents: As recommended by manufacturer for finish to be removed. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. B. The schedule is based on the products of ICI Paint Stores and Kelly Moore Paint Co., Inc. as follows: NO. PRODUCT NAME (ICI PAINT) TYPE 1. 1000 Ultra-Basecoat Primer Latex 2. 1030 PVA Primer/ Sealer Latex 3. 1110 Ultra -Hide Stain Jammer Vinyl Toluene 4. 1310 Ultra -Hide Prime-n-Finish, Alkyd 5. 1370 Spraymaster DTG Alkyd -Flat 6. 1402 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel Latex - Eggshell 7. 1406 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel Latex -Semi Gloss 8. 1434 Ultra -Wall Enamel Latex, Low Lustre 9. 1482 Spray Master Pro Uni-Grip WB Latex -Eggshell 10. 1516 Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel Alkyd, Semi -Gloss 11. 1582 Spray Master Dryfall Alkyd -Eggshell 12. 1700 Woodpride Stain Alkyd — Oil 13. 1802 Woodpride Interior Varnish Waterborne -Satin 14. 1808 Woodpride - WB Interior Varnish Waterborne Clear Gloss 15. 1916 QD Sanding Sealer Vinyl Toluene 16. 2000 Decra-Shield exterior primer Acrylic -Latex 17. 2406 Decra-Shield Acrylic -Semi -Gloss 18. 2516 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel Alkyd -Semi -Gloss 19. 3038 Ultra -Hide Durus Acrylic Gloss 20. 4000 Bloxfil Block Filler Acrylic 21. 4020 Devflex DTM Primer Acrylic 22. 4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer Alkyd 23. 4206 Devflex Acrylic Waterborne Acrylic, Semi -Gloss 24. 4308 Devguard Industrial Enamel Alkyd -Gloss 25. 4406 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy, Semi -Gloss 26. BF10 High Heat Coating Silicone Flat 27. HT-12 High Heat Silicone Flat NO. PRODUCT NAME (TELLY-MOORE) TYPE 1. 70 Kel-Guard Synthetic Rubber C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 3 05/03 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Moisture Content 1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. — a. Field test concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. Test moisture content of wood in accordance with ASTM D2016. 2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following — maximums: a. Gypsum Soffits: 12 percent. b. Plaster: 12 percent. c. Masonry, Unit Masonry: 12 percent. d. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. e. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. f. Concrete Floors: 7 percent. g. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: 12 percent. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Unpainted Surfaces 1. General a. Prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended procedures unless higher level of preparation is specified. b. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. d. Shellac and seal marks on wood surfaces which may bleed through surface finishes. 2. Impervious Surfaces a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces a. Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. b. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer. 4. Insulated Coverings _ a. v Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. 5. Concrete Floors a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. C. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved in accordance with ASTM D4262. d. Allow to dry. 6. Galvanized Surfaces ^' a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 4 05/03 7. Aluminum Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. r, b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. 8. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces a. Clean concrete in accordance with ASTM D4258. 1 b. Clean unit masonry in accordance with ASTM D4261. C. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and g allow to dry. e. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. f. Allow to dry. 9. Plaster Surfaces a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. C. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 10. Steel and Iron Surfaces a. Concealed Locations 1) " Remove grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with SSPC - SPI - Solvent Cleaning and/or SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning and/or SSPC - SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. b. Exposed Locations 1) Remove grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. 2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. 11. Interior Wood a. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. C. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. •� d. Fill open grain wood to receive opaque finish with wood filler. e. Fill nail and other anchor holes in wood to receive transparent finish with filler stained to match finish. ,.. 12. Wood Doors a. Seal top and bottom edges with clear or opaque primer as required for finish scheduled. ,A B. Primed and Previously Painted Surfaces 1. All Surfaces a. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. b. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating. . C. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces.. - d. Repair damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips and spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas. gift e. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth. f. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer. g. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. h. Clean surfaces with solvent. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 5 '"' 05/03 i. Prepare non-ferrous surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. j. Chemically Strip surfaces bare to substrate where indicated on drawings. 2. New Shop Primed Steel Surfaces a. Where higher level of preparation is specified in this Section than in other Sections for unpainted steel, comply with requirements of this Section and following: 1) At Contractor's option, either shop or field prepare steel in accordance with procedures specified in this Section. 2) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with lesser requirements specified in other sections, it is considered a temporary protective coating only. (a) Remove temporary shop coatings and prepare steel in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation for unpainted surfaces. 3) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation, field prepare in accordance with paragraph "All Surfaces" above. 4) Prime coat specified under paragraph 3.9, SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE, can be eliminated except for bare areas requiring touch-up. 3. Existing Steel Surfaces a. Prepare in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. — 3.4 APPLICATION A. Paint, Stain and Varnish 1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 8. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork with primer paint. 9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 6 05/03 r 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15391 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, t; ductwork, piping, and conduit. B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, '" collars and supports, occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms. y C. Replace identification' markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. D. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. �• E. Paint exposed conduit, boxes and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms. F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. G. Color node equipment, plumbing piping, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Shop Primed Equipment 1. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 2. Prepare and paint shop primed equipment as specified for base material and location. J. Shop Painted Equipment 1. Prepare and paint shop painted equipment as specified for base material and location as follows: a. Interior Finished Spaces (excluding mechanical and electrical rooms): Paint surfaces to match color of adjacent finish. This applies, but is not limited to, t^+ mechanical diffusers and electrical panels and covers. b. Exterior Equipment: Where noted on drawings, paint exposed mechanical and electrical equipment color as selected by Architect. er 3.6 PROTECTION OF DISSIMILAR METALS AND METALS IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE �,. A. Where specified in other sections, protect dissimilar metals that are in direct contact and metals set on or filled with mortar or concrete with one coat of coal tar paint equal to Carboline Bitumastic Super Service Black. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1. When requested by Architect, provide verification of coating application and durability in accordance with specified requirements at no cost to the Owner. B. Steel Surfaces 1. Dry Film Thickness: Verify in accordance with SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 2. Adhesion: Confirm adhesion of coating system to substrate in accordance with either ASTM D3359 (Method B) or ASTM D4541. C. Concrete Floors 1. Verify compliance in accordance with ASTM D1546. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 7 "°' 05/03 D. Other Surfaces 1. Film Thickness a. Measure wet film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4414 and convert to dry film thickness by multiplying wet film thickness by percent soilds and by percent solvent added. b. Measure dry film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4138. E. Scrubbability 1. Test interior flat latex paints in accordance with ASTM D2486. F. Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints: Test in accordance with ASTM D4540. G. High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings: Test in accordance with ASTM D3730. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Repair surfaces which have been destructively checked for dry film thickness. B. Recoat surfaces determined not to be in conformance with dry film thicknesses specified. C. Recoat in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.9 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.10 SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE A. Exterior Surfaces Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Aluminum 4020 (3.0) 2406 (2.0) 2406 (2.0) Ferrous Metals -- * Gates, 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) Fencing, **or** **or** Bollards, 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) Bumper Guards, Railings, Exposed Lintels, Misc. Metal * Muffler Exhausts Temp to 1000 Deg. HT-12 (1.0) HT-12 (1.0) Temp to 500 Deg. HT-10 (1.0) HT-10 (1.0) * Doors, Frames 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) and Equipment **or** **or** 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 8 05/03 Galvanized Metals 4160(2.0) 4308(2.0) 4308(2.0) Louvers, **Or** **or** Ducts, 2516(2.0) 2516(2.0) Downspouts, Misc. Wood 2000(2.1) 2406(1.4) 2406(1.4) B. Interior Surfaces Surface 1st Coat (DWT) 2nd Coat (DMIFT) 3rd Coat (DAM Concrete Concrete Walls 1030 Varies 1406(1.4) 1406(1.4) Concrete Floors 70(1.0) 70(l.0) Concrete Masonry (CMU) 4000 Varies 1406(1.4) 1406(1.4) **or** **or** 1402(1.4) 1402(1.4) **Or** **or** 1434(1.4) 1434(1.4) Plaster 1000 varies 1406(1.4) 1406(1.4) **or** **Or** 1402(1.4) 1402(1.4) **or** **or** 1434(1.4) 1434(1.4) Metal Decking Galvanized Primed Ferrous Metals Bar Joists & Beams (Exposed) Doors and Frames, Railings, Equipment 1370 1582(2.0) 1582(2.0) 1482(2.0) 1482(2.0) **or** **or** 1582(2.0) 1582(2.0) 4160(2.0) 1482(2.0) 1482(2.0) **or** **or** 1582(2.0) 1582(2.0) 4160(2.0) 1516(2.0) 1516(2.0) **or** **or** 4308(2.0) 4308(2.0) 03879602 PAINTING 09900-9 05/03 Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Galvanized Metal * Ducts, 1370 1516(2.0) 1516(2.0) Louvers, **or** **or** **or** Piping, 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) Vents Gypsum Drywall * Surfaces to 1110 (1.1) 1110 (1.1) receive vinyl (if required) wall covering. * Room no's. 1030 (1.1) 4206 (1.5) 4206 (1.5) All other 1030 (1.1) 1406 (1.5) 1406 (1.5) spaces. **or** **or** 1402 (1.5) 1402 (1.5) **or** **or** 1434 (1.5) 1434 (1.5) * Wood Drawer 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Cabinet Thin 50% Thin 25% Interiors **or** **or** Transp. Finish. 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) * Trim, Transp. 1802 (1:0) 1802 (1.0) Finish Thin 50% Thin 25% **or** **or** 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) * Trim, Transp. 1700 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Finish (Stained) Thin 50% Thin 25% **or** **or** 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) * Cabinets, Ext. 1700 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Interiors Thin 50% Thin 25% Transp. Finish **or** **or** (Stained) 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) * Cabinets, Ext. 1310 (1.5) 1516 (1.4) 1516 (1.4) & Interiors Opaque Finish. 03879602 PAINTING 09900 - 10 05/03 Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Wood Doors Transp: Finish 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% **or** **or** r 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) " Stained & Transp. Finish 1700 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% „ **or** **or** 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) END OF SECTION V k=:_x AM 0"k Pik SECTION 09915 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Color of the interior materials and products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The word "color" includes surface color, pattern and texture as indicated. B. Patterns and textures required for interior finishes, including both factory applied and field applied colors unless specified elsewhere. C. When color is not designated for items, propose a color for approval. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. General 1. Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other sections of the specifications. 2. Specific locations where the various materials are required are shown on the drawings. 3. Items not designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR COLOR SCHEDULE A. Walls 1 CMU Type 1. 2. Mortar CMU Type 1. B. Trim 1 Bollards. 2. Sealants; Match adjacent colors. 3. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Paint, match existing. 4. Louvers. 5. Soffits: Paint, match existing. 03879602 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 09915-1 05/03 2.2 INTERIOR COLOR SCHEDULE LEGEND DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER COLOR REMARKS FLOOR Fl VCT Armstrong, Excelon 51858 "Sandrift White" F2 Carpet Collins & Aikman, Explorer Selected from Full Range No Substitutions F3 Tile Daltile, Keystone Match Exist Patch tile to match existin F4 Sealed Concrete Clear F5 Terrazzo Tile Fritz Tile R8033 "Dawn Beige" BASE B1 4" Resilient Roppe, 700 Series P191 "Camel" WALLS Wl Paint, GWB Kelly Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank" W2 Paint, Existing Plaster Kelly Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank" W3 Paint, CMU Kelly Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank" W4 Paint, CMU Kelly Moore Match Existing WS Fiberglass Reinforced Panels (FRP) XXX Selected from Full Range CEILING C1 2X2 Acoustic Lay -In Fine Fissured White C2 Existing Plaster -Armstrong, Kelly Moore Match Existing C3 Existing Concrete/Plaster Kelly Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank" C4 Existing Plaster Kelly Moore Match Existing MISCELANEOUS COLORS P1 Hollow Metal Trim Paint Kelly Moore KM554-L "Jocobean" P2 Wood Stain Match Existing P3 Solid Surface Veneer Wilsonart, Solid Surfacing 9030-ML "Baja Melange" P4 Laminate Counter Top Nevamar MK-2-2T "Greige Matrix" P5 Corner Guards Pawlings Selected from Full Range P6 Metal Toilet Partitions Knickerbocker Selected from Full Range P7 Floor Transitions Roppe 140 "Fawn" P8 Window Coverings Levolor Selected from Full Range P9 Exterior of CMU Kelly Moore Match Existing P10 Epoxy Resin Counter Top Black 03879602 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 09915 - 2 05/03 2.3 FINISH SCHEDULE WALLS CEILINGS MISC. COLORS FL R NO. ROOM DESCRIPTION FLR BASE N III IS W TYPE HT (ft- in REMARKS DOOR FRAME MILLWORK BASE BID P2 P1 P3 2 201 WAITING F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" R4 P2 Pi P3 2 202 RECEPTION F2 B l W l Wl W l W l Cl 9'-0" R4 P2 Pi P5 2 203 1 OFFICE F2 B 1 Wl W l W l WI Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 204 1 OFFICE F2 B1 W1 Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 205 WORK F2 B1 Wl Wl W1 W1 Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 206 OFFICE F2 B I W l W 1 W l WI Cl 9'-0" P2 P 1 2 207 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl W1 Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 208 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl W1 W1 Wl Cl I 9'-0" P2 P1 2 209 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 1210 1 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 211 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl W1 Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 212 OFFICE F2 III Wl W1 Wl Wl Cl 9'-09, P2 P1 2 213 OFFICE F2 Bl Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 214 HALL F5 III W1 Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 P5 2 215 INTERVIEW F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 1216 1 INTERVIEW F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl W1 C1 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 217 TECH F2 B1 Wl WI WI Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 218 STORAGE F2 B 1 W l W I W 1 W l Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi P7 2 219 HALL F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 P5 2 2.20 POLYGRAPH F2 B 1 Wl W l W l W 1 Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 221 POLYGRAPH F2 III W l W l W 1 W l Cl 9'-0" R4 P2 Pi 2 1 222 1 OFFICE F2 III Wl W1 Wl Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 P8 2 223 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi P8 2 224 HALL F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl I Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 P5 2 225 HALL F2 B 1 W l W l W 1 W l Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi P4, P5 2 226 ELECTRICAL Fl B1 Wl Wl Wl W1 Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 227 OFFICE F2 B 1 WI W l W 1 W l Cl 9' -0" P2 Pi 2 228 OFFICE F2 BI Wl I Wl WI Wl C1 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 1 229 CONFERENCE F2 B 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 WI Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi P4, P8 2 230 HALL F2 B1 Wl W1 W1 WI Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 P5 2 231 HALL F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi P5 2 232 CLOSET F2 B1 W1 Wl W1 Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 P7 2 233 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 234 OFFICE F2 B 1 W l Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi 2 235 OFFICE F2 B l W I Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 Pi 03879602 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 09915 - 3 05/03 WALLS CEILINGS MISC. COLORS FL R NO. ROOM DESCRIPTION FLR BASE N E S W TYPE HT (ft- in) REMARKS DOOR FRAME MILLWORK BASE BID P2 P1 P3 2 236 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl W1 Wl Cl 9'-01, R4 P2 Pi 2 237 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 2 238 HALL F2 B1 W1 Wl W1 Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 Pi P5 2 239 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl WI Wl WI C1 9'-01, P2 P1 2 240 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl C1 9'-01, R4 P2 P1 2 241 EXIST MENS TOILET F3 B1 W2 W2 W2 W2 Cl 9'-01, P2 Pi P6 2 242 EXIST WOMENS TOILET F3 B1 W2 W2 W2 W2 Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 P6 2 243 EXIST MECHANICAL X X X X X X - 2 244 EXIST CORRIDOR X X X X X X X X R2 2 245 EXIST CORRIDOR X X X X X X X X R2 2 246 HALL F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-0" P2 Pl P5 OPTION #1 1 101 EXIST LOBBY Fl B1 Wl Wl W1 Wl Cl 9'-01, R2 1 102 EXIST HALL FI B1 WI W1 Wl W1 C1 9'-01, 1 103 WAITING Fl B1 WI Wl Wl W1 Cl 9'-05, P2 P1 1 104 RECEPTION F2 B1 Wl Wl WI Wl Cl 9'-01, 1 105 HALL F2 B1 WI Wl Wl Wl C1 9'-01, P2 P1 P5 1 106 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl WI WI Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 1 107 OFFICE F2 B1 WI WI Wl Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 Pi 1 108 OFFICE F2 B1 Wl WI WI Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 1 109 OFFICE F2 B1 W1 Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 Pi 1 110 FILES Fl B1 Wl WI Wl Wl C1 9'-01, P2 Pi 1 III FILES Fl B1 W1 WI Wl I WI C1 9'-01, P2 P1 P5 1 112 HALL F2 B1 WI Wl WI Wl C1 9'-0" P2 P1 1 113 BREAK ROOM Fl B1 Wl Wl WI Wl Cl 914, P2 P1 P4,P7 1 114 TOILET F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl WI C1 9'-01, P2 Pi 1 115 MECHANICAL F4 - W3 W3 W3 W3 - - P2 Pi 1 116 EXISTING MECHANICAL X - X X X X - - 1 117 EXIST HALL X X X X X X X X R2 1 118 EXIST MENS TOILET X B1 W2 W2 W2 W2 Cl 9'-01, 1 119 EXIST WOMENS TOILET X B1 W2 W2 W2 W2 Cl 9'-01, 03879602 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 09915 - 4 05/03 WALLS CEILINGS MISC. COLORS FL R NO. ROOM DESCRIPTION FLR BASE N E S W TYPE HT (ft- in REMARKS DOOR FRAME MILLWORK BASE BID P2 P1 P3 1 120 STORAGE F4 X X X X X - - P2 P1 OPTION #2 2 260 HALL Fl B1 Wi Wl Wl W1 Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 2 261 CRIME SCENE OFFICER Fl B1 W1 Wl Wl Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 P2,P10 2 262 FINGER PRINT FILE Fl B1 W l W l W l W l Cl 9' -01, P2 P1 2 263 LAB Fl B1 Wl W1 Wl Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 P2,P10 2 264 WORK F2 B1 Wl W1 W1 WI Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 2 266 DARKROOM Fl B1 Wl Wl Wl W1 Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 P2, P4 2 266 A FINGER PRINT Fl Bl W1 Wl Wl W1 Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 2 273 SERGANT F2 B1 Wl Wl W1 Wl Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 2 275 EXIST MECHANICAL X X X X X X - 2 277 EXIST CORRIDOR X X X X X X X X R2 OPTION #3 2 243 EXIST CORRIDOR X X X X IX IX X X R2 2 265 WORK F2 B1 Wl Wl Wl WI Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 2 268 EVIDENCE STORAGE Fl B1 W4 W4 W4 W4 C3 X P2 P1 2 269 OFFICE STORAGE FI BI W4 W4 W4 W4 C3 X P P1 2 270 LATENTS STORAGEIPHOTO RM Fl B1 Wl W1 Wl W1 Cl 9'-0" P2 P1 2 271 AFID IMAGE ENHANCE Fl B1 Wl Wl W1 W1 Cl 9'-01, P2 Pi 2 272 HALL F1 B1 W1 Wl Wl W1 Cl 9'-01, P2 P1 2 274 COMPUTERIV IDEO LAB F2 B 1 W l Wl Wl W l Cl 9'-01, P2 Pi 2 275 EXIST MECHANICAL X X X X X X - - 2 1 276 HALL F5 B1 W1 Wl W1 W1 Cl 9'-01, P2 Pi 2 277 EXIST CORRIDOR X X X X X X X Ix R2 I OPTION #4 2 250 EXIST F2 B1 I Wl W1 W1 W1 C2 IX I RI, R3 03879602 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 09915 - 5 05/03 WALLS CEILINGS MISC. COLORS FL R NO. ROOM DESCRIPTION FLR BASE N E S W TYPE HT (ft- in) REMARKS DOOR FRAME MILLWORK BASE BID P2 Pi P3 AUDITORIUM R1 PATCH EXISTING PLASTER TO MATCH EXISTING WERE CHIPPED OR CRACKED R2 PATCH EXISTING CEILING GRID AND TILES TO MATCH EXISTING R3 EXISTING WOOD PANELING TO REMAIN R4 INSTALL CORNER GUARDS ON COLUMN CORNERS PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879602 COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 09915 - 6 05/03 I row SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this.Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal surfaced markerboards. B. Tackboards. C. Trim, marker rail and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System: Substrate construction behind markerboards. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for flame spread/smoke development ratings of for markerboards and tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations special anchor details. 2. Provide product data on markerboards, tackboards, trim and accessories. Include maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal. 3. Submit samples illustrating materials and finish, color, and texture of markerboard trim and tackboard surfacing. 4. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide life time warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing, cracking or staining. 03879602 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-1 05/03 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. B. Greensteel Division C. Best -Rite. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, 24 gage commercial quality. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ANSI/ASTM B221, 6061 T-5 alloy. C. Cork: Fine grain natural cork, homogeneous composition. D. Hardboard: FS LLL-B-810; tempered, smooth face. E. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet .002 inch thick. F. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Map Supports: Formed aluminum hooks (6 at each markerboard), sliding type to fit map rail. B. Provide 10 assorted markers and 2 erasers for each markerboard. ` 2.4 FABRICATION A. Markerboard 1. Trim: 5/8 inch wide x 0.062 inch thick extruded aluminum. 2. Marker Tray: 2 5/8 inch deep extruded aluminum, with rounded and smooth polished - ends; thru-bolted to writing surface. One piece, full length of markerboard; concealed fasteners. 3. Writing Surface: 24 steel with baked -on porcelain enamel surface. 4. Backing: 3/8 inch thick particle board or fiberboard with 0.002 inch thick foil backing. 5. Size and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 6. Map Rail: Extruded aluminum with integral cork insert. 2.5 FINISHES A. Marker Surface: White porcelain. B. Aluminum Frame and Accessories: Clear anodized aluminum, satin finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking are ready to receive work, and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate construction. 03879602 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 2 05/03 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install markerboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure units level and plumb. C. Butt markerboard panels to tackboards tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. 3 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. t' B. Cover markerboard and tackboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION - SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL <, 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments, and urinal screens. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Framing and Sheathing: Concealed wood framing and blocking for compartment support. B. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Texas Accessibility Standards. B. ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austentic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. E. FS A-A-60003 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, and door swings. C. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements. B. Coordinate Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall.. 03879602 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 - 1 •+ 05/02 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Accurate Partitions Corp. 2. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 3. Global Steel Products. 4. The Mills Co. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Floor mounted and overhead braced. - 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, commercial quality. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Toilet Compartments: Baked enameled steel, floor -mounted headrail-braced. E. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges, mitered and welded comers ground smooth. 1. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage. 2. Pilaster Faces: 18 gage. 3. Reinforcement: 12 gage. 4. Internal Reinforcement: Furnish in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. F. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. _ 3. Accessible Door Width: 36 inch, out -swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch. G. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. H. Urinal Screen Splash Panels: Stainless steel sheet 24 inch wide x 42 inch high mounted on partitions adjacent to urinals. Fasten with stainless steel screws spaced 8 inches oc. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666 type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip profile and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Stainless steel. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. E. Hardware: Stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two for each door. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Sliding door latch. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 03879602 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 - 2 05/02 t ' 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one for each compartment, mounted on door. 6. Furnish two door pulls for outswinging doors — one mounted on each side of door. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Baked Enamel Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel B. Color: As indicated in Section 09915 - Finish Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. E. Comply with Texas Accessibility Requirements for spacing of partitions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. D. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. r*a 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opened position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION 03879602 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 - 3 05/02 SECTION 10210 METAL WALL LOUVERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7, A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Fµ Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fixed louvers and frames. B. Insect Screening 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Prepared exterior wall opening. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting. D. Division 15 Section - Fans: Ductwork attachment to louver. E. Section 15714'- Filters: Filter attachment to louver. ,�. F. Section 16400 - Motors and Equipment Controls and Wiring: Power to louver operator. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AA - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. C. AAMA 606.1- Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. D. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for #" Architectural Aluminum. E. AAMA 608.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. Oft F. AMCA 500 (Air Movement Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. G. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. H. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. I. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars. .� J. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. K. ASTM A653/A653M -Sheet Steel, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality. L. ASTM A740 - Hardware Cloth (Woven or Welded Galvanized Steel Wire Fabric). F M. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. N. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. Oft 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 1 05/03 O. FS RR-W-360A - Wire Fabric, Industrial P. FS RR-W-365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening). 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Fixed Louver Section 1. Installed louver to permit passage of air velocity as required by mechanical specifications without blade vibration or noise, with maximum static pressure loss of 0.10 inches. 2. Fabricate louver to permit minimum percent free area as required by mechanical specifications. 1.6 QUALrFY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with three years experience. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate on shop drawings, layout, elevations, dimensions and tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screening; and frames. 2. Provide product data on preassembled louvers describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, free area, materials and finishes. 3. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 4. Submit operation and maintenance data including lubrication schedules and adjustment requirements. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with installation of unit masonry. B. Coordinate work of this Section with mechanical ductwork and electrical services to motorized devices. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cesco Products, Minneapolis, MN. B. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.; Cincinnati, OH. C. Ruskin Manufacturing, Grandview, MO. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 6063-T5. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, galvanized to G90 zinc coating, factory primed for field painting. D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A283, galvanized to G60 zinc coating. E. Fasteners and Anchors: ASTM A307, galvanized steel type. 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 2 05/03 - d F. Accessories L Linkage a. Concealed in jamb. 2. Operator a. Control circuit: 2 wire, 120 volt, 60 hertz. b. Return: Automatic spring powered upon power interruption. C. Case: Die cast aluminum, NEMA Type I. d. Operating environment: -40 to 136 degrees F. e. Accessories: Splined crank arm, linkage connector as required by conditions and t" dustproof cover. G. Insect Screening: Interwoven wire mesh of .011 inch diameter aluminum wire, 0.063 inch • diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, square design. H. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame. I. Sealants: Type specified in Section 07900. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Louver Size: Refer to mechanical drawings. B. Louver Blade Design: 1. Fixed Louver Section a. .081 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5 sloped at 45 degrees; K-style; integral waterstops on blade. C. Louver Frame 1. General a. Channel shaped with welded corner joints. F b. Fixed sections to mesh tightly to form rigid waterproof mullion with no exposed fasteners. 2. Fixed Louver Section:.125 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5. D. Sill Flashings: One piece per louver; roll formed to shape indicated on drawings or if not indicated as required in conformance with SMACNA 7-3 B. E. Screens: Permanently install screen mesh in shaped frame with reinforced corner construction; screw to louver frame. 2.4 FINISHES A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces and Exterior Surface of Blank -Out Sheeting: 0.4 mil thick dark bronze anodized coating complying with AA mill finish. B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces, Screens and Blank -Out Sheeting: 0.4 mil thick dark bronze anodized coating complying with AA mill finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the louver manufacturer. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 3 '" 05/03 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Secure louvers in opening framing with concealed fasteners. D. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. E. Install insect screening to interior of louver. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement with actual control; lubricate operating joints. B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION 03879602 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 4 05/03 SECTION 10260 CORNER GUARDS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. B. End -wall guards. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: In -wall supports. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. k 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Corner guards to resist lateral impact force of 1001bs at any point without permanent damage. 1.6 SUBMITTALS t A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide plans indicating locations for corner guards and end -wall guards. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing for all components. B. Product Data 1. Indicate physical dimensions, system features, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. C. Installation Instructions - 1. Indicate installation rough -in measurements and instructions. D. Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84 for surface finish. s 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 03879602 CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 1 '� 05/03 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate work with wall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Muncy, PA. B. Institution Product Corp.; Muskego, WI. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Corner Guard 1. Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick, 3 inch wide with 1/4 inch corner radius. 2. Cover Retainer:.063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match comer guard. 4. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have matte finish pebble grain texture, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 5. Acceptable Product: Construction Specialties model SM-20. B. End Wall Guard 1. Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick x width of finish wall with 1 /4 inch corner radiuses. 2. Cover Retainer:.063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. Cushion: Manufacturer's standard shop applied sponge neoprene. 4. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match comer guard. 5. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have matte finish pebble grain texture, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 6. Acceptable Product: Construction Specialties model FSC-25. C. Accessories 1. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate. 2. Vinyl Cove Base Support: Manufacturer's standard rigid aluminum. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for attachment. C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that rough -in for components are correctly sized and located. 03879602 CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 2 05/03 - L Look 3.2 INSTALLATION _f, A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Position comer guard flush with top of base, extend to 7' 2" above finish floor. C. Install end -wall guards flush with top of base, extend to 7' 2" above finish floor. END OF SECTION P, .7 I 03879602 CORNER GUARDS 10260-3 05/03 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. B. Fire Extinguishers. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Roughed -in wall openings. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE +.� A. Provide cabinets with UL label matching fire resistance rating of partition scheduled to receive cabinet. B. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. C. Conform to Texas Accessibility Standards for mounting height and protruding object requirements. r 1.5 REFERENCES A. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops e B. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. ' 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, rough -in measurements, location, details and fire rating of cabinets. B. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed operation and maintenance data. a. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re -certification requirements. 1.7 PROTECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. 03879602 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 1 05/03 �7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 1. J. L. Industries, Bloomington, Minnesota. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, Minnesota. 3. Potter-Rommer, Inc., Cerritos, Calif. B. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers 1. Type I a. Fire Class: A,B,C b. Type: Multi -purpose Dry Chemical C. Capacity: 5 pounds d. Range: 15 feet e. UL Rating: 2A-IOB:C f. Shell Material: Enameled Steel g. Weight: 171bs. B. Cabinets: 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. C. Door: 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. D. Door Catch: Manufacturer's standard roller catch. E. Glazing: Clear wire tempered safety glass. F. Hinge: Continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin. Hinge material to match door and exposed cabinet frame. G. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. H. Pull Handle: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel surface type. I. Lettering: Die cut red vinyl. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. B. Cabinet 1. Form body of cabinet with tight inside comers and seams, spot welded. 2. Predrill holes for anchorage. 3. Form cabinet face trim 1 1/4 inch wide with maximum 2 inch square return to wall surface. 4. Size: To accommodate extinguishers specified. C. Door 1. Frame Type a. 2 inch thick, 1 1/4 inch wide frame with mitered comers. b. Mount flush with face of cabinet trim. D. Lettering: Affix lettering to door in vertical position to read "FUZE EXTINGUISHER". 03879602 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 2 05/03 -< 2.4 FINISHES A. Extinguishers: Baked red enamel. y B. Cabinet Interior: White baked enamel. C. Cabinet and Door Frame: Manufacturer's standard white baked acrylic enamel. D. Pull Handle: Satin finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION ' A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets 1. Install one cabinet at each location noted on drawings. 2. Install plumb and level in wall openings. 3. Mounting height from finished floor to pull handle of cabinet shall comply with Texas Accessibility Standards. 4. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SCHEDULE A. Cabinets 1. Install one Type I fire extinguisher in each cabinet. END OF SECTION e^ r 03879602 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 3 05/03 k SECTION 10800 VW TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL a_ 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: In wall blocking and framing for support of accessories. B. Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile: Wall finish. C. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments: Supporting construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to Texas Accessibility Standards for location and mounting height of accessories. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Texas Accessibility Standards. B. ANSUASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. E. ANSUASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. G. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. H. ASTM A500 - Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. I. ANSUBHMA A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. J. FS CID A-A-2380 Dispenser, Paper Towel. K. FS DD-M-00411 Mirrors, Glass. L. FS WW-D-1908 Dispenser, Toilet Paper, Cabinet. M. FS WW-H-1911 Holder, Toilet Paper (Single Roll). 03879602 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 '` 05/03 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install grab bars in conformance with structural strength requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards without damage to supporting structure or finishes. 1.7 SUBMITTALS r A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes and installation location by room for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 1.8 KEYING A. Supply 6 keys for each accessory to Owner. B. Master key all accessories to existing system for building. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; North Hollywood, CA. B. Bradley Corporation; Menomonee Falls, WI. C. McKinney/Parker; Scranton, PA. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. B. Exposed Sheet Steel: ASTM A525. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. D. Tubing: ASTM A500, stainless steel. E. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Clear; Quality q1 mirror select; 1/4 inch thick minimum. F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof. G. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. H. Hardwood: Red oak, first grade in conformance with NHLA. I. Primer: Zinc Chromate. 03879602 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 05/03 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bar 1. Conformance: FS WW-P-541/8B (Am.1), Type IV, Class 2, Form and length as indicated in schedule at end of this Section. 2. Acceptable products a. Form a: Bradley #8120-00 length as indicated on drawings. B. Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD) 1. Conformance: CID A-A-2380, Type Ell. 2. Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multi -fold towels. 3. Size: Approximately 11 -inches wide, 4-inches deep and 15-1/4-inches tall. C. Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispenser (SND) 1. Conformance: FS WW-P-541/8, Type 11, Style S (surface mounted), stainless steel, disposable liner type. 2. Size: Approximately 12-inches wide, 6-1/2-inches deep and 26-inches tall. 3. Where wall thickness is not sufficient for full flush installation, provide matching collar to permit semi -recessed installation with minimal protrusion from the wall. D. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SNTD) 1. Conformance: FS WW-P-541/8, Type I, Style S (surface mounted) or Style P (partitions mounted), stainless steel, disposable liner type. 2. Size: Approximately 10-3/4-inches wide, 4-inches deep and 15-1/8-inches tall. a. Surface Mounted: Approximately 10-3/4" wide, 4" deep & 15-1/8" tall. b. Recessed Mounted: Approximately 10-3/4" wide, 4" deep, and 17-1/8" tall. C. Partition Mounted: Approximately 10-3/4" wide, 2" to 1-1/4" deep and 17-1/8" tall. E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD) 1. Conformance: Surface mounted -single roll. 2. Size: Approximately 7-3/4" wide x 3-5/8" deep x 2" tall (theft resistant spindle). F. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1. Type: Vertical stainless steel tank, liquid type. 2. Size: Approximately 5-inches wide, 3-inches deep and 8-inches tall. G. Shower Curtain Rods (SR) 1. Conformance: A156.16, L08101, 1 1/4 inch diameter, 18 gauge stainless steel curtain rod with matching flanges for concealed attachment to wall. H. Shower Curtain Hooks (SH) 1. Chrome plated or stainless steel spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate curtain rod size specified above. I. Mirrors (M) 1. Size: 18" x 36." 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1 Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. 2. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. 3. Form surfaces flat without distortion, scratches or dents. 4. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. J" 5. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. 6. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 03879602 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-3 05/03 7. Fabricate all accessories with concealed mountings covered by finished snap -on or set screw type escutcheons or mountings concealed behind units with doors unless otherwise specified. 8. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 9. Provide manufacturer's standard keyed lock in all accessories having doors. 10. Provide continuous type hinge on all accessories having doors. B. Grab Bar (GB) 1. Fabricate from 1-1/2 inch OD seamless stainless steel tubing with 1 1/2 inch clear projection between wall and bar. 2. Provide integral mounting flange with screw mounting holes concealed on lip of flange and designed to support grab bar in compliance with specified performance requirements. 3. Provide one piece flange covers fabricated to fit over wall anchors and fixed by means of not less than three set screws. 4. Fabricate bends in conformance with Texas Accessibility Standards. , 5. Stainless Steel: Either 302 or 304 L, 16 gauge (.064") minimum for 13" for 12" O.D. bars and 18 gauge (.050") minimum for 1" O.D. bars. 6. Finish: Satin finish. In addition, provide manufacturer's standard non -slip surface, either knurled or peened, over gripping surface of bars. 7. Attachment: concealed. 8. Construction: Provide one piece construction with ends returned to wall with integral intermediate supports as required. All joints shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished on exposed surfaces, finished to present uniform matching appearance throughout. 9. Anchors: Provide sub -anchors as required at each support, size and type as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of wall and finish condition. Support on drywall or plaster bases solely by means of toggle bolts is prohibited. C. Mirrors 1. Fabricate with 18 gauge stainless steel angle frame with seamless square mitered comers, welded and ground smooth. 2. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel back and 18 gauge cold rolled steel hangar, all welded construction. D.. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SND) 1. Fabricate body and lid from not less than 0.0312-inch stainless steel and back from not less than 0.0250-inch stainless steel. 2. Fabricate lid with integral slope to front and integral handle. 3. Fabricate with bottom service door equipped with tumbler lock. E. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1. Fabricate from not less than 0.0375-inch stainless steel 2. Fabricate with clear non -breakable plastic fill level indicator and key type fill cover. 3. Valve: All purpose liquid type, chrome plated brass valve body and stainless steel valve mechanism with integral check valve. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123, A386 to 1.25 oz/sq. yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSI/ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin polished finish. E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster. 03879602 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 05/03 m PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Install grab bars in conformance with performance requirements specified. PIN 03879602 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 5 �°' 05/03 3.4 SCHEDULE ®�Evidence " e�neseeeeeBeeeeeee e� eseseeeeeeeeeeeee Chambere�= eseseeeeeeeeeeeee e� DryingEvidence Chamber eseseeeeeeeeeeeee 03879602 05/03 END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 6 raw SECTION 12345 LABORATORY CASEWORK !' PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS _g A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section. f 1.2 SUMMARY P" A. This Section includes the following fabrications: 1. Base cabinets. 2. Tops. 3. Accessories. B. This Section includes the following existing equipment relocation: 1. Relocate Owner's existing fume hoods. C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for laminated plastic laboratory countertops. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for wall base installation at laboratory casework. 3. Division 9 Sections for flooring types installed in laboratory casework areas. 4. Division 15 and 16: Installation of mechanical and electrical service fixtures is "^ specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. --5. Division 15: Fume hood vent connections from hood duct collar to hood exhaust system is work of Division 15. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and r ' - Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data and installation instructions for each type of laboratory casework item specified. R + C. Independent laboratory certification that applied finish complies with specified chemical t IJ and physical resistance requirements. D. Samples for initial color selection. 1. 6-inch square samples of specified casework material finishes. 2. 6-inch square samples of top materials. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for laboratory casework showing plans, elevations, ends, cross -sections, service run spaces, location and type of service fixtures with lines thereto, location of access doors, cut-off valves and junction boxes and connection to hood exhaust system. Show details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors, walls, and 03879602 LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345 - 1 "' 05/03 base. Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows, and other building components. Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing laboratory casework fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed laboratory casework unit installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain laboratory casework from one source and by a single manufacturer. D. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be indicated for convenience in identifying certain laboratory casework work. Unless modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog description for indicated number constitutes requirements for each such item 1. The use of catalog numbers, and specific requirements indicated on drawings and in the specifications, are not intended to preclude the use of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures which may be equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing standard of design and quality for materials, construction and workmanship. E. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish: Submit an independent testing laboratory report certifying that the exterior finish of laboratory casework is capable of withstanding following tests, with no change, or slight change of gloss, slight discoloration, or slight temporary softening of film with no loss of adhesion and no loss of film protection. 1. Chemical. Spot Tests a. Apply 10 drops (approximately 1/2 cc) of each reagent to the surface to be tested. b. Cover each reagent with a watch glass, convex side down, in the center of the puddle to hold the reagent in place, except apply volatile solvent reagents to a cotton ball, and cover with an inverted 2 ounce wide mount bottle to retard evaporation. C. Allow reagents to remain on the surface for the time specified, and conduct the tests in such manner that the testing surface is kept wet throughout the entire test period. After time allowed for test has elapsed, wash the surface with soap and water, and dry before examination and evaluation. Time in Test Reagents Minutes Ratings Acetic Acid, 98% 6 Excellent Sulfuric Ace, 26% 60 Excellent Sulfuric Acid, 85% 60 Excellent Hydrochloric Acid, 37% 60 Excellent Nitric Acid, 25% 60 Excellent Phosphoric Acid, 75% 60 Excellent Perchloric Acid, 70% 60 Excellent 03879602 LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345 - 2 05/03 Time in Test Reagents Minutes Ratings Mehtylene Chloride 60 Excellent Sodium Hydroxide, 25% 60 Excellent ' " Sodium Hydroxide, 10% 60 Excellent Ammonium Hydroxide, 28% 60 Excellent Hydrogen Peroxide, 5% 60 Excellent Ether 60 Excellent Ethyl Alcohol 60 Excellent Ethyl Acetate 60 Excellent a*?s Xylene 60 Excellent _ Acetone 60 Excellent Formaldehyde, 37% 60 Excellent Carbon Tetrachloride 60 Excellent Methyl Ethyl Ketone 60 Excellent * Where concentrations are indicated, percentages are by weight. d. Performance Test Results (Bending Test): An 18 gauge metal strip, finished as specified, when bent 180E over a 1/2" diameter mandral, shall show no peeling or flaking off of the finish. e. Performance Test Results (Adhesion): Ninety or more squares of the test sample shall remain coated after the scratch adhesion test. Two sets of eleven parallel lines 1/18" apart shall be cut with a razor blade to intersect at right angles thus forming a grid of 100 squares. The cuts shall be ''. made just deep enough to go through the coating, but not into the substrate. They shall then be brushed lightly with soft brush. Examine under 100 foot candles of illumination. Note: this test is based on ASTM D2197-88, "Standard Method of Test for Adhesion of Organic Coatings". f. Performance Test Results (Hardness): Iwo The test sample shall have a hardness of 4-H using the pencil hardness test. Pencils, regardless of their brand are valued in this way, 8-H is the hardest, and next in order of diminishing hardness are 7-H, 6-H, 5 H, 4-H, 3-H, 2 H, F, HB, B (soft), 2-B, 3-B, 3-B, 4-B, 5-B (which is the softest). The pencils shall be sharpened on emery paper to a wide sharp edge. Pencils of increasing hardness shall be pushed across the paint film in a chisel -like manner until one is found that will cut or scratch the film. The pencil used before that one -that is, the hardest pencil that will not rupture the film -is then ` used to express or designate the hardness. 2. Moisture Resistance: No visible effect when finish surface exposed to the following: w. a. Hot water at a temperature of 1900 F (910 C) to 205' F (960 C), trickled down surface at 45 degree angle for 5 minutes. b. Constant Moisture using a 2" x 3" x 1" cellulose sponge, soaked with water, in contact with surface for 100 hours. 03879602 LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345 - 3 05/03 3. Cold Crack: No effect when subjected to 10 cycles of temperature change from 20' F (14' C) for 60 minutes to 125° F (52' C) for 60 minutes. 4. Adhesion and Flexibility: No peeling or cracking or exposure of metal when metal n_ is bent 180 degrees over a 1/4-inch diameter mandrel. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect laboratory casework units, tops and accessories during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration to Project site, and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination and other causes. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective coating. , B. Identify each item with specific location numbers as designated on shop drawings, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings. C. Do not deliver laboratory casework items until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed in installation areas. If laboratory casework items must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions". 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for laboratory casework items during storage and installation. Do not install laboratory casework items until these conditions have been attained and stabilized. B. Field Measurements: Where laboratory casework items are indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing laboratory casework items; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of laboratory casework items without field measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LABORATORY CASEWORK MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide laboratory casework and fixtures equal to Kewaunee Scientific Corp. 2.2 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK A. Fabrication 1. General: Complete assembly and finish work at point of manufacture. Perform unit assembly on precision jigs, to provide units which are square, fully reinforced with angles, gussets, and channels, integrally framed to form a dirt and vermin retardant 03879602 LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345 - 4 05/03 — J enclosure. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for heavy sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts, not exceeding 91_4 3/32-inches. Fabricate units on precision dies to provide field interchangeability of drawers, hinged doors, and similar pieces. 2. Drawers a. Suspension Assembly 1) Self rising, double stop, lock open feature, 2 sections, on ball bearing nylon rollers designed to maintain alignment of drawer, self -closing from a point 5" open, with integral drawer stop, drawer removable without the use of tools. 2) Open Clearance: 13-5/8" front to back when fully extended. 3) Include provisions to prevent rebounding action when doors are closed. 3. Table Legs: 2 112 inch square with 3/8 inch diameter bottom leveling bolt with 3-inch adjustment. Securely bolt table legs to table aprons. ate+ B. Cabinet Finish 1. Match stain in color and finish schedule. 2.3 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES `x A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard, stain finish hardware units, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Pulls: Solid metal, for drawers, mounted with 2 screws fastened from back. Provide 2 pulls for drawers over 24 inches wide. 2. Label Holders: Provide where indicated, size to receive standard label cards approximately 1-inch x 2-inches nominal size, finished to match other exposed hardware. 3. Leg Shoes: Extruded vinyl or rubber, black, open bottom type. t 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate laboratory casework and accessories to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. B. Assemble units in the shop in as large components as practicable to minimize field jointing. C. Install hardware uniformly and precisely after final finishing is complete. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises unless otherwise indicated. Turn screws to flat seat. Adjust and align hardware so that moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final field adjustment after installation. 2.5 COUNTER TOPS a. r A. Top Sizes: Furnish tops in maximum practicable lengths. B. Top Thickness: Maintain 1-1/4-inches thickness with tolerance not exceeding plus or minus 1/32-inches. Provide front and end overhang of 1-inch over base cabinets, formed p ` with continuous drip groove on under surface 1/2-inch from edge. C. Cast Epoxy Resin Tops: Factory molded tops of modified epoxy resin formulation, uniform mixture throughout full thickness. Color, non -glaring black. " 1. Physical Properties: Density, 1401bs. per cu. ft.; modulus of rupture, 3,5001bs. per sq. in.; modulus of elasticity, 4.46 x 1061bs. per sq. in.; flexural strength, 14,500 psi; compressive strength, 15,900 psi; shear strength, 5,400 lbs. per sq. in.; hardness, 03879602 LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345 - 5 °"t 05/03 Rockwell M, 100; water absorption in 24 hours, 0.02%; heat distortion point, 4000 F (204° C); highly resistant to thermal shock. 2. Chemical Resistance: ASTM D 543-67 at 77 degrees F. Spot test of following reagents in standard laboratory concentrations, in contact with finished top for 24 hours, entirely unaffected or slight dulling of finish; glacial acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, sulphuric acid, chromic acid, ammonium hydroxide, calcium hypochlorite, sodium hydroxide, acetone, amyl acetate, aqua regia, benzene, butyl alcohol, chloroform, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, formaldehyde, hydrogen peroxide, methyl alcohol, methyl ethyl ketone, kerosene, phenol, silver nitrate, trichloroethylene, xylene, zinc chloride. 3. Workmanship: Cast surfaces very smooth, with factory cut-outs for sinks and drip grooves. Plain butt type joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and prefitted, concealed metal spline. 2.6 SINKS A. All sinks provided by others. Cutout sizes shall be coordinated with Section 15000 PLUMBING FIXTURES. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION A. General: Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using , concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for accurate fit with fasteners concealed where practicable. B. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF TOPS A. Field Jointing: Where practicable, make in same manner as factory jointing using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate field joints as shown on accepted shop drawings, factory prepared so there is no job site processing of top and edge surfaces. B. Fastenings: Use concealed clamping devices for field joints, except for epoxy tops, located within 6-inches of front, at back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24-inches. Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to exert a constant, heavy clamping pressure at joints. Except for epoxy tops, secure tops to cabinets with "Z" - type fasteners or equivalent, using 2 or more fasteners at each front, end, and back. 1. For epoxy tops, secure to cabinets with epoxy cement applied at each comer and along perimeter edges at not more than 48-inches o.c. C. Workmanship: Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent any deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices. 1. Where necessary to penetrate tops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8-inches and plug hole flush with material equal in chemical resistance, color, hardness, and texture to top surface. D. After installation, carefully dress joints smooth, remove any surface scratches, clean and polish entire surface. 03879602 LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345 - 6 05/03 i E. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures. F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb and splash with walls a t recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Use chemical resistant, ` permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SINKS A. Set top edge of sink unit firmly pressed to counter top, set in manufacturer's recommended chemical resistant sealing compound to produce a tight and fully leakproof joint. Adjust ' sink and securely support to prevent movement. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EXISTING FUME HOODS A. Verify size and location of Owner's existing fume hoods to be relocated and installed. Provide all equipment required for complete installation and assure proper operations. B. Install Owner's existing fume hoods complete with base cabinet and with all mechanical and electrical systems connected to all applicable utilities. Provide escutcheons and collars on all piping and vents in walls and ceiling. C. Comply with all current codes and safety standards for all installation work of existing equipment. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install in a precise manner in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Turn screws to a flat seat; do not drive. Adjust moving parts to operate freely without excessive bind. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. B. Clean shop -finished surfaces, touch-up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas, as acceptable to Architect. C. Protection: Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed laboratory furniture from damage by work of other trades. END OF SECTION 12345 03879602 LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345 - 7 *"05/03 I W SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. B. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.3 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while 02036 05/15 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRiAL 15000 - 1 they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation- supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to ail detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. - J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. -� 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 2 05/15 required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 0. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the F standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by x ; Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 3 05/15 C. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall. provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall. be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish.all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the rnaterial is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 4 05/15 C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor !7 will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. r" C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 5 05/15 shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division as specified and required by the authorities. The Contractor shall tests. 1.16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES shall at his own expense perform the various tests Architect and as required by the State and local furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items, 1.18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 6 05/15 k- z 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. ' For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for.service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 7 05/15 -I 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. Coordinate with Division 9. Match existing paint scheme for identification of piping. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. 1.24 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.25 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. Under no condition shall any work be done in the present building that would interfere with its natural use during its normal hours of occupancy, unless special permission is granted by the Owner. This is particularly applicable where new connections are to be made to present lines or items of equipment in that building or where present equipment items in that building are to be relocated or modified in any way. The Contractor shall include this scheduling requirement in his proposal as no additional compensation for overtime work will be granted. 1.26 WORKING TIME A. Where new connections are to be made into existing lines, present lines must be relocated or rerouted, present equipment items relocated or other work accomplished that would affect the operation of the present building, the work shall be carried on at 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 8 05/15 such times as to cause a minimum of interference with the normal operation of that building. In certain cases the work may be accomplished during normal working hours during certain designated seasons or times of the year. In other cases the work may have to be executed during times of the day outside of the normal working period, on holidays, etc. Each individual case presents a separate decision as to the time during which it shall be performed. The Contractor involved shall present each case to the Architect for his decision, which will be made after due consultation with the Owner. No additional compensation for overtime will be granted for compliance with these requirements. 1.27 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. , By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences. with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be . relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example: 1. Existing Plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. Specifically, relocate piping and conduit as required to install the new ductwork. 1.28 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.29 SLEEVE DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall, before concrete is poured, prepare 1 /8" scale floor plan drawings on tracing paper and shall show on these drawings, with dimension lines, the size and 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 9 05/15 location of every pipe sleeve required for the passage of his lines. Prints shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to the setting of the pipe sleeves. 1.30 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.31 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.32 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1 /16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least _ 1 /2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 10 05/15 1.33 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.34 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.35 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. 1.36 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.37 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. END OF SECTION 02036 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 1 1 05/15 SECTION 15300 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES i PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the a^• applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-117 Type 11 No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR=35 PVC Soil Fittings - Elastomeric ASTM D3212 Copper Tubing ASTM B88 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Cast Bronze Solder Fittings ANSI B16.18 02036 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 1 05/15 Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Flange Bolt, Sets ASTM A120, A53, A106 ANSI B16.9 ANSI B16.11 ANSI B16.5 ANSI B16.3 Fed. Spec. WW-P-501 E ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1 /2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1 /2" and larger 465-1 /2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1 /2 P Globe 3-1 /2" and larger 351 21 E Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1 /2 P Angle 3-1 /2" and larger 353 23E B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated line, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and 0-rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems so that the handle will clear the insulation and jacket. E. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. 2.3 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T-handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and 02036 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 2 05/15 equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1 /2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-1 with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. 2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. B. Test Wells: Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. 2.5 MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS A. Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1 /2" stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. 2.6 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT (SMALL COILS ONLY) A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1 /4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1 /8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without.forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. b= 02036 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 3 05/15 D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes, not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of B" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. 3.3 PITCH PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch. 3.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1 /2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to Dow Corning Silicone RTV Foam Penetration Seal. 3.5 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 02036 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 4 05/15 L6: V% 3.6 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. B. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1 /8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. C. Mechanical Couplings: 1. Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be used to connect mechanical equipment and piping systems where specified. Couplings shall be equal to Victaulic Style 77 with housing fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings, in accordance with Federal Specification AA-1-666C Grade 11. Couplings gasket shall be equal to Victaulic Grade "H" molded synthetic rubber, per ASTM D-735-61, Grade No. R615BZ. Coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type with hexagonal heavy nuts, per ASTM-A-1183-60. 2. All pipe fittings used with couplings shall be fabricated of malleable iron castings in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-1-66C Grade 11. Where malleable fitting pattern is not available, fittings fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless welding fittings with grooved ends may be used. 3. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with cup grease or graphite paste to facilitate installation. 4. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. 3.7 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 3.8 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 02036 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 5 05/15 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.9 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.10 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other_ Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. 3.11 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 02036 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 6 05/15 3.12 IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition, list the various colors identifying the piping. END OF SECTION 02036 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 7 05115 p SECTION 15310 PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, piping inside of, under and within 10'0" of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. B. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier weight copper, red brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except that the same class of material shall be used throughout, insofar as practicable. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. All flanges shall be 150 psig rated. D. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. 02036 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 1 °'" 05115 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1 /4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1 /8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. 3. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. 4. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 3.3 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1 " in 8 hours. 3.4 DISINFECTING A. After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and. materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a -- liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being _ filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. 02036 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 2 05/15 C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less +� than 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. R, END OF SECTION s+ e+ w, s a; 02036 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 3 "'"" 05/15 SECTION 15330 CONDENSING, CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE a' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. +* 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled and heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install chilled and heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. C. Modify the condensing water system as required to install the new cooling tower. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Chilled and Heating Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Use Victaulic couplings on lines 4" and larger. Weld smaller lines. Lines 2-1 /2" and smaller shall be type L copper with solder joint fittings. B. Condensing Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Weld all lines. C. Drain Lines: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe assembled with 150 pound malleable iron, banded pattern, screwed fittings or, at the Contractor's option may be type L hard *+ copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. Do not mix the two materials. D. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Crane No. 976. Crane and Sarco acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION Oft 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS ,�► A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air w-. locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. .� B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. 02036 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330 - 1 a. 05/15 C. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required.. D. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. 3.2 CLEANING A. Chilled Water System: Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. B. Heating Water System: Same as chilled water system, except heat the solution. 3.3 TESTING A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. END OF SECTION 02036 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330 - 2 05/15 I SECTION 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E.. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where 02036 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 1 05/15 obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Architect. B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3 "w.c. Construction of low pressure systems shall be inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.4 DUCT LINER A. For use in return transfer ducts and sound boots only. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 2" with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .25 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. Duct liner shall comply with ASTM C1071 with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423. E. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 4" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. F. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.5 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS A. This ductwork shall be defined as that between the discharge of the supply fan and pressure reducing terminal boxes. This work shall be provided and installed as shown and as specified hereinafter. B. This ductwork shall be round in cross-section, flat oval or rectangular as shown on the drawings. It shall be constructed according to the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. Duct construction details shall be in accordance with the "High Pressure Duct Standard, 3rd Edition", published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 02036 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 2 05/15 aft I Contractors National Association Inc. except as may be abridged herein. 6" pressure class. C. All job -constructed ducts shall be made with longitudinal joints butted and welded. Round ducts 48" in diameter and smaller and all flat oval ducts shall be factory fabricated spirally wound conduit made from zinc coated steel strips. All such ducts �+» shall be delivered in standard lengths and shall be cut to proper length at the site by t power saw to insure proper fit and square alignment. D. Fittings used on round or flat oval ducts shall be shop fabricated by welding. Changes in direction shall be made with mitered fittings of at least 3 sections; 90 degree elbows shall contain not less than five sections. Branch takeoffs shall be at 45 degree, except where indicated on the drawings they may be 90 degree conical taps. The run of a conical take -off shall be not less than the diameter of the branch which it serves. This contractor shall furnish for review drawings of fittings which he proposes to use and shall not proceed with fabrication until review by the Architect. E. A high degree of dimensional accuracy is required in both conduit and fittings in order ,. that the installation may be strong, rigid, and within allowable limits of air leakage. Inside diameter of conduits when checked with ring gages shall show a variation from nominal diameter of not more than 0.030". Fittings shall be provided with male connections and, when checked with ring gages, shall show a variation from nominal outside diameter of not more than 0.015 inch. F. Transitions shall be all welded construction. In any required rectangular ells, provide Airsan "Acoustiturn" double thick acoustical turning vanes. •� G. All high pressure ducts having a dimension of 36" or greater shall be assembled using gasketed companion flanges. H. All other joints between conduits and between conduits and fittings shall be made with "Hardcast" cement reinforced with self -tapping drill screws. Conduits shall be joined with couplings. Adjoining surfaces of fitting or coupling and conduit at each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after receiving a uniform coat of cement shall be pressed together. Joints so formed shall be further strengthened by the use of hex head No. ** 7x12 self -tapping drill screws installed with a screw gun. Screws shall be equally t { spaced around the circumference and centered longitudinally on the joint. Use three screws per joint on conduit with diameters of 3" through 8" and space screws approximately 6" apart on conduit with diameters of 9" and over. Then seal the joint with "Hardcast" assembled using manufacturer's instructions. I. It is essential that all high velocity ductwork be practically air tight. After erection in place, and before being insulated or connected to the air distribution units, each high velocity duct system shall be tested for leaks. For the test, each system shall be capped of all openings. Pressure test according to the SMACNA procedure, admitting air thru a precision orifice and using pressure taps and a manometer. Under this test there shall ,., be no whistling leaks and the pressure drop across the orifice shall not exceed the p : pressure drop corresponding to 1 % air loss according to SMACNA Tables of the design air quantity in that branch. 2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES a A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional. volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in P11 02036 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 3 05/15 cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices. Generally flex duct shall not exceed 3'0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. 2.8 ROUND DUCT TAPS ` A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. 2.9 FIRE DAMPERS A. Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the Building Code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. B. Specifically, fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition and where a duct penetrates the roof, ceiling, floor or other areas requiring a fire rated separation. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Provide access panels in the duct and access doors in the ceiling or wall to service and test the damper. Access doors with vision panes shall be furnished with wire glass. 02036 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 4 05/15 C. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel and rated at 1-1/2 hours for partitions and floors rated up to 2 hours, and 3 hour rating for use in partitions ` and floors rated up to 4 hours unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type, those in high pressure duct shall be 100% free area and out of the air stream. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. D. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 150A. Fire dampers in ceiling air distribution outlets shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 400. 2.10 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Furnish and install a combination fire/smoke damper in all ducts penetrating fire/smoke partitions. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall meet all requirements �. specified elsewhere for fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft which, when rotated 90 degrees, causes damper to operate between closed and open. m Operating shaft and damper combination shall be suitable for linking to and operation by a pneumatic damper operator. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be Ruskin type FSD-36, Class II, 10 CFM/SF leakage @ 1 "SP for low pressure applications and Ruskin type FSD-60, Class I, airfoil blade, 4 CFM/SF @ 1 "SP for high pressure applications. B. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be furnished complete with factory sleeve and damper operator factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Actuator shall be of the spring return fail closed type that will close damper upon power interruption. Damper operators shall be UL listed as fire damper operators and bar the UL label for such. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip -on seals not acceptable). C. The smoke damper shall close on a signal from the fire alarm system or from the operator of a smoke detector. D. Provide access doors with ductports in the duct and a ceiling access door if necessary for servicing the damper and actuator. 2.11 ACCESS PANEL A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. 2.12 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. C. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. D. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. 02036 AIR DISTRIBUTION 05/15 15400 - 5 E. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. F. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Barber Colman, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Metal -Aire or Krueger will be acceptable. 2.13 SERIES FAN POWER HYDRONIC HEAT TERMINALS A. Furnish and install TITUS Model PTQS constant volume series fan powered terminals of the sizes and capacities shown on the plans. Space limitations shall be reviewed carefully to ensure that all terminals will fit the available space. B. Terminals should be certified under the ARI Standard 880-89 Certification Program and carry the ARI Seal. C. The terminal shall be designed, built, and tested as a single unit including motor and fan assembly, primary air damper assembly, water or electric heating coils, and accessories as shipped. Unit shall ship as a complete assembly requiring no field assembly (including accessories). All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the National Electric Code. Electrical connection shall be single point. All electrical components, including low voltage controls, shall be mounted in sheet metal control enclosures. The entire terminal shall be ETL or UL listed as a complete assembly. D. The terminal casing shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with dual density glass fiber insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Any exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent entertainment of fibers in the airstream. The terminal shall have a round duct collar for the primary air connection and a rectangular discharge suitable for flanged duct connection. The casing shall be designed for hanging by sheet metal straps. E. The terminal casing shall have a bottom access panel which allows removal of fan and servicing of terminal without disturbing duct connections. F. The fan shall be constructed of steel and have a forward curved, dynamically balanced wheel with direct drive motor. The motor shall be suitable for 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase power. The motor shall be of energy efficient design, permanent split capacitor type, with integral thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated bearings, and be specifically designed for use with an SCR for fan speed adjustment. Fan assembly shall include an anti -backward rotation design, torsion -flex tuned spring steel suspension, and isolation between motor and fan housing. G. The terminals shall utilize a manual SCR, which allows continuously adjustable fan speed from maximum to minimum as a means of setting fan airflow. Setting fan airflow with an device that raises the pressure across the fan to reduce airflow is not acceptable. The speed control shall incorporate a minimum voltage stop to preclude motor under voltage operation. H. The primary air damper assembly shall be heavy gauge steel with solid shaft rotating in Delrin or bronze oilite self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking, and a synthetic seal to limit close -off leakage to the maximum values shown in Table B. I. The primary air damper assembly shall be heavy gauge steel with solid shaft rotating in Delrin or bronze oilite self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Damper leakage shall not exceed 5% of the manufacturer's scheduled maximum fan capacity at 1 " wg. inlet static pressure. J. Sound ratings for the terminals shall not exceed 30 NC at 0.25 inlet static pressure, and discharge static pressure of 0.3". Sound performance shall be ARI certified. 02036 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 6 05/15 s� a.' Radiated Path Attenuation 2 3 4 5 6 7 Environmental Effect 3 2 1 1 1 1 Ceiling Effect 9 10 12 14 15 15 Room Effect 9 10 11 12 13 14 Total dB Reduction 9 10 11 12 13 14 Discharge Path Attenuation 2 3 4 5 6 7 Environmental Effect 3 2 1 1 1 1 End Reflection 11 6 2 0 0 0 Duct Lining 1 3 8 21 20 12 5'8" Flex Duct 6 10 17 19 19 12 Room Effect 9 10 11 12 13 14 Total dB Reduction 30 31 39 53 53 39 The radiated and discharge path attenuation function for the specified NC shall be based upon factors found in ARI Standard 885-90 and shown in the tables above. No additional attenuation factors shall be deducted from the sound power. K. Sound attenuators required to achieve the previously specified sound criteria are acceptable. The cost of field assembled or field installed sound attenuators shall be borne by the terminal manufacturer. L. Hot Water Heating Coils: Hot water heating coils shall be enclosed in a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel casing with flanged construction for attachment to metal ductwork. Coils shall be factory installed on the terminals. Fins shall be rippled and corrugated heavy gauge aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes. Tubes shall be copper with minimum wall thickness of .016", with male solder header connections. Coils shall be leak tested to 300 psi, with minimum burst pressure of 2000 psi at ambient temperature. Number of coil rows and circuits shall be selected to provide performance as required per the plans. Coil performance data shall be based on tests run in accordance with ARI Standard 410. M. Install units so that complete access to box is possible. Provide access doors that may be removed from the bottom, with the lay -in ceiling 6" below the box. END OF SECTION r oft 02036 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 7 "� 05/15 APs4 SECTION 15500 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Conc. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161,272 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 02036 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500 - 1 ""` 05115 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 2.3 HANGER SPACING Size of Steel Pipe or Copper Tube Supported 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and 4" 5" through 8" 10" and larger Size of Cast Iron Pipe Supported 3" and smaller 4" through 6" 8" through 10" 12" and larger A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line 3/4" and smaller 1 " through 1-1 /2" 2" and larger All cast iron lines PART 3 EXECUTION Hanger Spacing in Feet 5 7 10 5 (Minimum two per joint) 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117 expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes not 02036 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500 - 2 05115 s,a 3. i r MOP?,k: Ar4. AA. t1D11 exceeding 1/2" and for loads of 200 Ibs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 Ibs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. 2 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500 - 3 SECTION 15600 INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated .J herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure r� NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS "k A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with one coat insulating cement equal to OC-110 built up to the thickness of the adjoining pipe covering and vapor seal with two 1/8 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic equal to Benjamin Foster No. 65-07 reinforced with glass fabric extending 2" onto the adjacent insulation. 02036 INSULATION 15600 - 1 05/15 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be - neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. 1. Chilled Water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT 850". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 2. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 3. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 4. High Pressure Ducts: a. Insulate the high pressure ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick. Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch 02036 INSULATION 15600 - 2 05/15 �' r; wide facing strip. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Note that double wall duct need not be insulated. °# 5. Ducts — Note that sound boots and return transfer ducts shall be lined. a. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory ' - applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks "- and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. PW d. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. 6. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1 " thick Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers Oft over fiberglass insulation. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15600 - 3 r 'SECT%ON157O0 EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with the applicable provisionsmftho General Conditions, Spoon| Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1'2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings onall items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all |mbmr, materials, equipment and mmn/ke necessary for and incidental Tmthe mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or mmspecified herein. EL This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the dn*xvingm' Equipment referred tosingularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown orspecified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item ofequipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system mhsU be provided. ' D., This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed inservice. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the omntnoot and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, xxinom ' no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5, Quality 6' Quantity PAJRT2 PRODUCTS � 2.1 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment.Motorswith mpeom| operating `conditions such am multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings orbelts shall conform tothe following requirements: 02038 EQUIPMENT 05/15 1. Less than 1 /6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 2. Fractional larger than 1 /6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. The Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.3 INDOOR MOUNTED AIR HANDLERS A. General: 1. Furnish and install York AirPak horizontal draw-thru, double wall air handling unit. All internal components specified in the air handling unit schedule shall be factory furnished and installed. Unit shall be completely factory assembled. The unit cooling capacity, ventilating capacity and performance shall meet or exceed that shown on the schedule. 02036 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 2 05/15 r■c mN� 2. All necessary tags and decals to aid in the service or indicate caution areas shall be provided. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panel access door. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. 3. Units shall ship in three (3) pieces. Lifting lugs shall be supplied on each side of the split to facilitate rigging and joining of segments. B. Base and Frame: The entire unit shall be provided with a full-length, continuous, base rail channel. Base rail shall be formed of a minimum of 12 gage galvanized steel. The base rail shall have a minimum height of 8 inches. All major components shall be supported from the base. Integral lifting lugs shall be provided. C. Unit Casing: 1. The unit shall have a frame construction consisting of cast corner pieces and galvanized steel vertical and horizontal structural members. The frame shall be constructed to permit complete removal of the wall and roof panels without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. 2. All segments shall be double wall and shall be constructed of G90 mill galvanized sheet steel, formed and reinforced to provide a rigid assembly. The exterior casing shall be constructed of a minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. The interior lining shall be a solid lining of a minimum of 20 gage. Fan section shall be perforated lining of a minimum of 18 gage galvanized steel or aluminum. D. Removable Panels: 1. All wall and roof panels shall be completely removable for unit access and removal of components. All access panels must be removable without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. 2. All panels shall be completely gasketed with a minimum of 1 /4" thick and 3/4" wide closed cell neoprene. E. Access Doors: 1. Double wall access doors shall be provided in the fan, access and filter section on the drive side of the unit. Access section shall require access doors on both sides of the unit. 2. Doors shall be of similar thickness and construction as the wall panels. A 3/8" bulb -type gasket shall be provided around the entire door perimeter. Industrial style hinges shall permit a complete 180-degree door swing. F. Fan Segments: 1. The supply air fan segment shall be equipped with double width double inlet centrifugal airfoil type wheel and shall be Class II as required for stable operation. 2. Fan and unit performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430. 3. All airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA Seal Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA certified ratings program for air and sound. In addition, all airfoil wheels shall comply with AMCA standard 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82. 4. After the pre -balanced fan is installed in the air handler, the entire fan section shall be run -balanced at the specified speed to insure smooth and trouble -free operation. The run balance shall include filter in horizontal and vertical planes and filter out balancing in all three (3) planes, on both sides of the fan assembly at the bearings. 5. Fan bearings shall be self -aligning; pillow block or flanged type regreaseable ball bearings and shall be designed for an average life (L50) of at least 200,000 hours. G. Fan Drives: Fan drives shall be selected for a 1.5 service factor and multiple anti -static belts shall be furnished. H. Fan and Fan Motor Isolation: Fan and fan motor shall be internally mounted and isolated on a full width isolator support channel using 2 springs. The fan discharge shall be connected to the fan cabinet using a flexible connection to insure vibration -free operation. 02036 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 3 05/ 15 I. Coil Segment: The cooling coil segment can accommodate 20" of coil space and shall have a full width 4" sloped drain pan extended downstream of the coil to provide sufficient amount of space to contain moisture carryover and shall be furnished with a stainless steel drain pan. J. Coil Removal: All unit coils shall be removable, from the, _unit, b_y the removal of a single (1) wall panel without disturbing roof or adjoining panels of the unit. K. Coils: 1. Cooling coil shall be furnished to meet the performance requirements set forth in the schedule. All coils shall have performance certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. 2. Coil casing to be constructed of 16 gauge galvanized steel with .006" aluminum die -formed corrugated fins. The fins shall have drawn collars, be belled and mechanically expanded to firmly bond the minimum 5/8" copper tubes to the fins. Header and connections shall be of copper. 3. Drainable water coils shall be designed to operate at 250 psig design working pressure and up to 300F and shall be tested with 325 psig compressed air under water. Circuiting shall provide free and complete draining and venting when installed in the unit. All vent and drain connections shall be extended to the outside of the unit casing, 4. Coils shall be circuited for counter flow of air and water. Water velocities shall not to exceed 7 feet per second and/or exceed the water pressure drops scheduled. All coils must have same end connections and shall be minimum 8 rows and maximum 8 fins per inch. L. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: The combination filter/mixing box shall combine the filtering and mixing functions in one standard segment. Filter media shall be arranged in an angle configuration and shall provide 4" filters with media as specified. The mixing box segment shall consist of multi -leaf, acting blades, with inter -connecting return air and outside air dampers. The section shall have a hinged access door on the drive side of the unit and furnished with magnehelic filter gauge. Filters shall be pleated with a minimum efficiency of 30% per ASHRAE Standard 52-76. M. Standard Low Leak Dampers: Dampers shall be of low leak design having stamped 16 gauge galvanized steel blades. The damper blades shall be provided with a PVC coated polyester fabric mechanically locked into the blade edge. The jamb is a flexible metal, compression type. Leakage shall not exceed 7.20 CFM/square foot at 1 " w.g. and 14.0 CFM/square foot at 4" w.g. The blades shall be opposed acting. N. Access Segment: Access Segment shall be provided in the unit to gain access to a particular area. The access segment shall have a depth of 24" and shall be furnished with access doors on both sides of the unit. O. Service Lights: Service lights shall be provided in the fan and access sections and shall be furnished with individual on/off switches. 2.4 OUTDOOR ROOF CURB MOUNTED AIR HANDLER A. General: 1. Furnish and install York CurbPak or equal double wall air handling unit. All internal components specified in the air handling unit schedule shall be factory furnished and installed. Unit shall be completely factory assembled. The units cooling, heating, ventilating capacity and performance shall meet or exceed that shown on the schedule. 2. The air handling unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor application. Unit shall be designed for curb mounting. 02036 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 4 05/15 02096 05/15 3. All necessary tags and decals to aid in the service and/or indicating caution areas shall be provided. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panel access door. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. 4. Units shall ship in one (1) piece where possible. Shipping splits shall be provided as required for installation. Lifting lugs shall be supplied on each side of the split to facilitate rigging and joining of sections. B. Unit Base: 1. The entire unit shall be provided with a full-length, continuous, base rail channel. Base rail channels shall be formed of a minimum of 12 gauge galvanized steel. All major components shall be supported from the base. Integral lifting lugs shall be provided to facilitate rigging and installation. Lifting lugs shall be suitable for use as unit tie down points. 2. The unit base shall be designed with a recessed curb mounting location. The recessed curb -mounting surface shall provide a continuous, surface for field application of curb gasketing to create a weathertight seal between the curb and unit. C. Unit Casing: 1. The unit shall have a frame construction consisting of integral galvanized steel vertical and horizontal structural members. The frame shall be constructed to permit complete removal of the wall and roof panels without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. 2. All panels shall be double wall and be constructed of G90 mill galvanized sheet steel, formed and reinforced to provide a rigid assembly. The exterior casing shall be constructed of a minimum of 18 gauge galvanized steel. 3. Roof and sidewall seams .shall be continuously caulked and covered with formed 20 gauge galvanized seam caps. All panel fasteners shall be secured through standing seams to prevent fastener penetrations that are exposed to the airstream. 4. The unit shall have a sloped roof to promote drainage of precipitation and prevent standing water. The roof shall have a minimum pitch of 1 /4 inch per foot. The roof shall overhang the side panels by a minimum of 2 inches to prevent precipitation drainage from streaming down the unit side panels. 5. Exterior casing screws shall be zinc chromate coated. 6. The panel insulation shall be a full 2" (non -compressed) throughout the entire unit. The insulation shall meet the flame and smoke generation requirements of NFPA-90A. D. Removable Panels: All wall and roof panels shall be completely removable for unit access and removal of components. All panels shall be removable without affecting the structural unit frame. Panels shall be completely gasketed, with a Copolymer rubber sealant ribbon. E. Access Doors: 1. Double wall access doors shall be provided in the fan, filter and inlet sections of the unit on the coil header -side of the unit. Access doors shall also be provided on both sides of the unit in all sections constructed with welded panels. 2. Doors shall be double wall construction with a solid liner and a minimum thickness of 2 inches. Doors shall be attached to the unit with a continuous, full-length piano -type stainless steel hinge. Latches shall be positive -action, creating an airtight seal between the door and unit. 3. Panels shall be completely gasketed with a closed -cell, neoprene gasket. 4. The interior lining shall be a perforated lining of a minimum of 20 gauge galvanized steel. EQUIPMENT 15700 - 5 F. DWDI Fan Sections: 1. The fan section shall be equipped with double width, double inlet (DWDI) centrifugal type wheels for horizontal discharge. An access door shall be provided on the coil header side of the unit for fan/motor access. 2. All units with double width, double inlet fans shall have fan and unit performance rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430. 3. All airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA Seal. Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA certified ratings program for air and sound. In addition, _ all airfoil wheels shall comply with AMCA standard 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82. G. Fan Drives: Fan drives shall be selected for a 1.5 service factor and anti -static belts shall be furnished. H. Fan Motors: 1. Fan and fan motor shall be internally mounted and isolated on a full width isolator support channel using 2" springs. The fan discharge shall be connected to the fan cabinet using a flexible connection to insure vibration -free operation. 2. Fan motors shall be NEMA design TEFC High Efficiency ball -bearing type with electrical characteristics and horsepower as specified. Motors shall be 1750 RPM, totally enclosed, fan cooled type. The motor shall be located within the unit on an 4 adjustable base. I. Cooling Coil Segments: 1. The cooling coil segments shall have a full width sloped drain pan to assure positive condensate drainage The drain pan shall extend downstream of the coil to provide sufficient amount of space to contain possible moisture carryover. 2. A pipe chase shall be provided to enclose field piping. The pipe chase shall have 1 " insulation and have double wall construction 3. Cooling coils shall be furnished to meet the performance requirements set forth in the schedule. All coils shall have performance certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. 4. The primary surface shall be 5/8" O.D. copper tube, staggered in direction of airflow. Tubes shall be mandrel expanded to from fin bond and provide burnished, work -hardened interior surface. The tubes shall have a minimum tube wall thickness of .020". 5. The extended surface shall consist of die -formed, continuous, aluminum fins. The fins shall have fully drawn collars to accurately space fins, and to form a protective sheath for the primary surface. The fin thickness shall be .006". A phenolic coating shall be applied to the primary and extended surfaces of the coil. The complete coating shall show no evidence of softening, blistering, cracking, crazing, flaking, or loss of adhesion. The process shall result in a three mil dry film coating. 6. Coil casing to be constructed of 16-gauge stainless steel with aluminum die -formed corrugated fins. The fins shall have drawn collars, be belled and mechanically expanded to firmly bond the copper tubes to the fins. 7. Drainable Water coils shall be designed to operate at 250 psig design working pressure and up to 300°F and shall be tested with 325 psig compressed air under water. Circuiting shall provide free and complete draining and venting when installed level in the unit. All vent and drain connections shall be extended to the outside of the unit casing. 8. Coils shall be circuited for counter flow of air and water. Water velocities shall not exceed 7 feet per second and/or exceed the water pressure drops scheduled. All coils shall have same end connections regardless of the number of rows deep. 9. Headers shall be of heavy seamless copper tubing, silver -brazed to tubes. Connections shall be of red -brass, with male pipe threads, silver -brazed to the 02036 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 6 05/15 i a 02036 05/15 header. A 1 /4" FPT, plugged, vent or drain tap shall be provided on each connection. 10. Cooling coils shall have not less than 8 rows or more than 8 fins per inch. J. Integral Face and Bypass Coil Segment: 1. Integral Face and Bypass Coils shall be factory supplied and installed. Coils shall be as manufactured by the L.J. Wing Company. 2. Coils shall be ARI Certified for capacity in compliance with ARI Standard 410. 3. Each coil shall consist of a built-in series of finned heating elements and bypasses with interlocking dampers. Dampers shall be controlled by a damper motor and airstream thermostat. 4. Dampers shall be 16 gauge, roll -formed steel with air-dried enamel finish. The coil casing shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel with rigid framework, completely painted. Coils shall be factory tested at 200 psig steam and 500 psig hydrostatic pressure. K. Drain Pans: 1. The main coil drain pan shall be sloped to assure positive condensate drainage with a condensate connection opposite the coil header side of the unit. The pan shall be of double- wall construction with a stainless steel liner. The pan shall have a minimum of 2" of insulation. 2. Coils with finned height greater than 48" shall have an intermediate drain pan extending the entire finned length of the coil. The intermediate pans shall have drop tubes to guide condensate to the main drain pan. L. Flat Filter Segment: The filter frames shall be constructed of galvanized steel and be built as an integral part of the unit with [front loading] [side service] with a standard access door on the coil header side of the unit. Flat filter segments shall accommodate 2-inch media. The media shall be throwaway 30% pleated as determined by ASHRAE Standard 52-76. M. Filter Gauge: A magnahelic, differential pressure gauge shall be factory installed and flush mounted on drive side to measure the pressure drop across the filter bank. N. Inlet Segment: 1. The inlet segment shall be designed to form a plenum. The outside and return airstreams shall be directed into each other by the damper assemblies to facilitate mixing of the airstreams. The inlet segment shall consist of multi -leaf, parallel acting blades, with inter -connecting return air and outside air dampers. The dampers shall be located in the bottom and rear of the unit. 2. The outside air damper shall be sized for 100% of unit airflow. The damper shall be covered with a factory assembled rain hood. The rain hood shall have a drip -lip the full width of the hood to channel moisture away from the air being drawn into the unit 3. A steel safety grate shall be factory installed over the return air opening in the floor of the unit. O. Ultra -Low Leak Dampers: Dampers shall be of ultra -low leak design having airfoil blades constructed of 14 gage, double skin, galvanized steel. The damper blades shall be provided with extruded vinyl edge seals and flexible metal compressible jamb seals. Leakage shall not exceed shall not exceed 3.70 CFM/square foot at 1 " w.g. and 8.0 CFM/square foot at 4" w.g. The blades shall be opposed acting. P. Diffuser Segment: Diffuser Segment shall be constructed with a perforated diffuser plate assuring even distribution of airflow across the entire unit air tunnel. Q. Access Section: Access Section shall be provided for placement anywhere in the unit to gain access to a particular area. The access section shall be available with a depth of 24". The access section shall be provided with a door as standard on the header side of the unit. R. Discharge Plenum: A discharge plenum segment shall be provided with a bottom discharge opening. EQUIPMENT 15700 - 7 S. Roof Curb: A prefabricated galvanized steel mounting curb shall be provided for field assembly on the roof decking prior to unit placement. The roof curb shall be a perimeter type with complete perimeter support of the air handling unit. The curb shall be a minimum of 14 inches high. Gasketing shall be provided for field mounting between the unit base and the roof curb. The curb shall include a 2" x 4" wood nailer. The roof curb shall be insulated with 1.5 inch-3# insulation. 2.5. VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLS - Serves New Air Units A. General: Establish requirements for variable voltage variable frequency motor controls, for speed control of fans, or blowers driven with AC motors. Provide IDM GVT series or equal. B. Variable Frequency Motor Control: The control shall be constructed of new materials only. The control shall produce a 3 phase output capable of providing efficient operation of standard NEMA or IEC design AC induction motors. The control shall consist of a power section made up of a fixed AC to DC converter, a fused filter, _ storage network, and an inverter using either bipolar transistors or IGBT's in the power switching section. The logic control section shall be microprocessor based using a 16-bit processor and VLSI for minimum parts count and maximum reliability. The power section shall be isolated from the control logic between the driver output of the control printed circuit card and the power switching devices. Pulse -Coded Sine Wave reconstruction via IGBT switches. C. Input power: 3 phase, 60 Hz, either 208, 230, or 460 VAC 1. Nominal input voltage +/- 10% 2. Input frequency stability +/- 5% 2. Comply to IEEE 519-1981 without external modification on a power system with 2% maximum source impedance and a capacity of at least 1.04 times the control full load input current. 3. Comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing device from 7 MHZ to 30 MHZ for conduction limit without external modification. D. Output power: 3 phase, 1.5 to 60 Hz with variable voltage to give proper and efficient operation of variable torque load. E. Overload capacity factory set at 125% for 1 minute, programmable from 100% to 150%. _ F. Minimum Requirements for Reliable Control Operation: 1. Fused input door interlocked disconnect 2. Isolated 115 VAC control transformer 3. Digital annunciated fault and limit functions for: a. Thermal overload relay trip b. Microprocessor self -check function c. Output overcurrent trip d. DC bus overvoltage trip e. Inverse time overload trip f. Heatsink overtemperature trip g. DC bus fuse open h. DC bus overvoltage (regen. limit) i. Output ground fault 4. Lamp annunciation for the following functions: a. Inverter ready light b. Inverter run light c. Bypass run light _ d. Bypass safety lockout light (red) e. Inverter safety lockout light (red) f. Input line power on light 02036 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 8 05/15 02036 05/15 g. Control voltage enabled light G. Minimum Required Standard Features: 1. Door mounted components: a. Inverter run indication b. Bypass run indication c. Remote safety lockout indication d. Digital speed (frequency or percent speed) and motor output amp meters e. Manual speed potentiometer f. Inverter / Off / Bypass switch g. Front push-button for fault reset and enable h. Manual / Auto reference selector switch i. Annunciation 2. Digital fault diagnostic front panel stores and displays up to four faults in sequence of occurrence for fault tracing. 3. DC bus charged indicator 4. Current limit circuit active to prevent nuisance tripping during accel or run conditions. 5. Regeneration limit circuit active to prevent nuisance OV tripping during deceleration. 6. Minimum and maximum speed set, separate and non -interactive. 7. Auto restart selectable after power failure, controller fault, or both. 8. Auto restart after power loss selectable for auto speed mode only. 9. Critical frequency lockout for up to 3 frequencies, available from 0 to 100% speed with adjustable bandwidth of at least 10%. 10. Only non -filament type indicating lights may be used. 11. Control shall survive, without component failure, and annunciate, output phase to phase and phase to ground faults. 12. Two contactor bypass circuit, electrically and mechanically interlocked, and integral ..to enclosure with branch circuit protection in accordance with NEC. 13. Control shall have the following isolated instrument signal follower: a. 0 to 10 vdc b. Loss of reference protection, where the control constantly monitors the input analog speed signals for abnormal changes, i.e. where the analog reference signal changes by more than 90% in 500 msec or less. The control shall then maintain its speed at 80% of the last speed commanded, until such time as the control is commanded to stop or the analog reference returns to normal. c. Volts per hertz ratio shall be automatic, tracking motor load requirements to achieve most efficient operation. Potentiometer adjustments not allowed. d. Control shall have available 15 selectable volts per hertz patterns, with programmable voltage reduction during run to maximize energy savings. e. Control must be capable of starting into a spinning motor and switching from inverter to bypass back to inverter without delay and without tripping off line of the inverter. Also must be capable of stopping a motor rotating in the reverse direction and then accelerating that motor in the proper direction. f. To reduce possible acoustical noise and electrical interference the control must have an automatically variable carrier frequency from 380 to 17000 hertz. There shall be no sudden frequency shifts which cause acoustical noise increases during shifts in the motor. NEITHER UNIT NOR MOTOR SHALL GENERATE ANY AUDIBLE NOISE ABOVE THAT GENERATED WITH ACROSS -THE -LINE CONNECTION (Cooling fan noise excluded). g. Control shall have a fused door interlocked disconnect with fuses rated for proper branch circuit protection. h. Isolation transformers or line reactors are not allowed. L Control must comply to IEEE 519-1981 General Systems, Special Applications. EQUIPMENT 15700-9 N j. Control must comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing devices, conduction limit between 7 MHZ to 30 MHZ. k. All components must be supplied in an integral enclosure, separate enclosures are not allowed. I. All controls will require ETL or equal Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory approval. H. Signal Outputs: 1 Unit shall have one Normally Closed inverter contact and one Normally Closed bypass contact. 2. Each unit shall be furnished with a 0 - 10 Vdc signal output which shall be proportional to unit speed or amperes ( user selectable ). 3. LCD display read out of : a. Reference Input Hertz Output Output Voltage Output Current Output KW. f- b. On -the -Fly Programming capability. c.. User selectable IGBT switch signaling. d. RS-232 Interface capability. r I. Cabinet Construction: 1. Mechanically and Electrically Interlocked Starters with Thermal Overload Protection for Inverter and By-pass. 2. Hinged Door access for Inverter section which allows access to all components with. out disconnection of any wiring or removal of any components from unit chassis. 3. Face access to all fusing. 4. Input line fusses to protect the inverter. By-pass fuses to protect the motor. — 5. Hand-held/Door-mounted programming interface module. J. Approval: The variable speed control shall be as manufactured by IDM controls or approved equal. Deviations may not be taken from this specification without written approval. All substitutions shall require a sample to be delivered to the approving authority for testing prior to approval. The approving authority shall not be held responsible for any damages to the drive during testing. K. Warranty, start-up, and training: 1. The drive supplier shall include a one year warranty that includes parts and labor and guarantee unit down times not to exceed 24 hours of notification. 2. The drive supplier shall include factory start-up. 3. The drive supplier shall train the owners personnel to identify, test, and replace items in the case of failure. Training shall include programming instruction and basic motor, inverter, and speed control theory. 2.6 COOLING TOWER A. Furnish and install as shown on the plans, factory -assembled, induced -draft, crossflow, cooling tower design with vertical air discharge. B. Principal construction shall be of heavy gauge; G235 galvanized steel angles and channels. Casings shall consist of fiberglass -reinforced polyester (FRP) panels or CT anodized steel. C. Capacity: The cooling towers shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer as scheduled. Additionally, the performance shall be certified by the Cooling Tower Institute in accordance with CTI Certification Standard STD-201 or, lacking such certification, a - field acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty period in accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the Cooling Tower Institute, or other qualified independent third party testing agency. _ D. Air Inlet Louvers: Inlet louvers shall be wave formed, fiberglass -reinforced polyester (FRP) spaced to minimize air resistance and prevent water splash -out. 02036 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 10 05/15 i 9 02036 05/15 E. Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basins shall be the open gravity type. Basin weirs and plastic metering orifices shall be provided to assure even distribution of water over the wet deck surface. F. Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from polyvinyl chloride (PVC), shall be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or biological attacks. The surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure control of the final product. G. Mechanical Equipment: 1. Fans shall be heavy duty, axial flow, with aluminum alloy blades. It shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. 2. Fan and shaft shall be supported by heavy-duty, self -aligning, grease packed ball bearings with moisture -proof seals and integral slinger rings. All bearings shall be designed for minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. 3. Fan shall be driven by a one-piece multi -groove, neoprene/polyester belt or gear drive designed specifically for cooling tower service. 4. Fan sheave shall be cast aluminum and motor sheave shall be protected from moist discharge air by a vented enclosure. 5. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed, air over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type, designed specifically for cooling tower service. Motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts and bearings. H. Access and Safety: A hinged access door shall be provided for access to eliminators and fan plenum section. A heavy gauge, hot -dip galvanized wire fan guard shall be provided over each fan cylinder. I. Unit Size: Dimensions and weights shall be compatible with the existing support structure. Submit manufacturer's recommended supported arrangement to demonstrate compatibility. J. Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be made of Type 304 Stainless Steel. All other steel panels and structural elements shall be made from heavy gauge G235 galvanized steel, with edges given a protective coat of zinc -rich compound. K. Vibration Cutout Switch: Furnished by manufacturer, mounted on structure to open fan circuit upon sensing expressive vibration. L. Pan Freeze Protection: Provide electric immersion heaters, factory installed in sump to prevent freezing, with thermostat and low water control. M. Bypass Connection: Provide bypass connection in the cold water basin. N. Provide galvanized ladder and guard rails. O. Warranty: Provide one-year parts warranty from date of start-up with an extended 4- year parts warranty for fan, fan shaft, bearings and motor. END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT 15700 - 11 w., SECTION 15800 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. B. Notification is given hereby that the commissioning of this project is expected to be complex. Comfort conditions must be effected and maintained. The building will be fully occupied. The new systems will be served by existing piping and ductwork which must be carefully adjusted to share the energy resources with existing systems to remain in service. TAB services shall include both the new HVAC systems AND the existing systems shown on the drawings or which are affected by the new systems. C. The work under this section shall be subcontracted to the following TAB Agency. Any substitution must be approved by the Architect and the Owner prior to award of the contract. N. D. White Engineering Services, 8212 Ithica Av., Lubbock, Texas 79423. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the. furnishing. of all labor, materials, .. transportation, tools and appliances and in performing:, all operations in, connection i:w.ith the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions 1 thereof to -produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation':. devices, and :.other.: end:: results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical .equipment; -check,, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain; optimum conditions -in each-.; conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation .of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after. occupancy. of, the building to. . insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout.. and. to -satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in atypical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the. 02036 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 1 05/15 obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. -A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each pump, coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the - reading shall be listed. 1. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction. manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of ..each piece of : equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as: directed. Provide complete. data>. on all equipment, including for: each item:: a . parts list, and the: a . name and address�of=the, vendor where replacement parts,,can b&purchased: • END OF SECTION 02036 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 2 05/15 ON! , ^� SECT|ON158OO ^- TEMPERATURE REGULATION PART1 GENERAL '. 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with mpp|ioobb» provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, � General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all 6mvcmo' pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation mhmU rmfmnonom each component device by designation used on 1.3 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall include in his bid on amount necessary to cover a onnnp|m1e oyntann ofautomatic temperature regulating equipment. B. The system ohm|| be an extension of, and compatible with, the existing myotano. The existing system is m hybrid which is primarily pneumatic in its operation ammmpt for certain sensing functions, remote starting and stopping provisions, resetting mrnongmrnmnto' building automation, energy rnmnmgmnmmnt' and m|arnn indications which are performed by Direct Digital equipment. The existing equipment is Johnson Controls ' .'."K8mtasym~. ' . C. ,It ohmU include all master and oubmmmotmr thermostats, vahw»si dampers, and operators, ` amplifiers, air nooeivarm' mvvitchmm' piping, air regulator, mda9o, multiplexers, cabinets, ' etc. required to nnoka it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. . D. The wiring for all the remote indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices mhmU originate in m terminal board and m*tend to andconnect to all multiplexers, mdaym' thermocouples, and similardevices.The miring ohmk be performed ' by the Contractor under this omoth»n in accordance; mHth°diagrammm.on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings mddoh this contractor shall provide. All wiring required for controls, or for power for controls shall be installed in conduit and provided by the Contractor under this section. Refer to- Division 10 for materials and methods which are acceptable. E. The temperature regulation equipment ohoU be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference e|mevvhara herein, but ohoU be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. F. The Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic dampers, and all automatic valves. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all damper and valve operators and all other switches, rm|oyo etc. connphoimgthmtmrnpmratunonogu|s�on��otamn Temperature ' -'-~! ' ' ' regulation specified herein is based on Johnson Controls. 02036 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900-1 p� Q5/15 ^ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSED AIR A. The existing air compressor will be reused to provide control air. This Contractor shall begin at the existing air line, connect 1 " to the service and extend it according to the various requirements cited by, and inherent to, the descriptions herein. A manual valve shall be provided to allow isolation of the building from the service. Verify the location of the existing air line. Provide a ball valve at connection point. -' 2.2 GAUGES A. Provide and install two inch dial pressure gauges at each pneumatic valve and damper operator to indicate its performance. All such gauges shall be identified by a permanent tag or label indicating to which operator they apply. 2.3 THERMOSTATS A. All thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point. B. Thermostats shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree of set point. C. Those for exposed installation in finished areas shall have plain cases and concealed adjustments unless specifically described otherwise herein. D. The interrelationship of reset schedule of all submaster instruments shall be job -adjustable and. capable of broad ranges of specific value. E. The locations of all room type thermostats are indicated on the 'drawings. The -` Contractor shall examine these locations and if, in his opinion, the. operation of any instrument would be improved by changing its location, he shall so notify the Architect. .With -the. Architect's approval, he shall install thethermostat in the location of his choice. 2.4 SAFETY LOW LIMIT A. : Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type .with bellows actuated switches. TwentyJoot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest section of its length. 2.5 PRESSURE CONTROLLERS A. -Differential pressure controllers shall be direct :or reverse acting to provide fully proportional control of pneumatic motors and valves. Air pressure output will be. varied in relation to the difference in water pressures it senses. B. Static pressure regulators shall be direct or reverse acting with adjustable setpoint and throttling range with field calibration capability. 2.6 STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS A. All static pressure sensors shall be of the force balance feedback, linear output type. The range should be 0-7" of water adjustable in 2" of water spans. B. For certain applications, as listed in the specifications, static pressure sensing and control shall be incorporated in the same instrument. If so, this device shall be direct or reverse acting with a range of 0-8" of water and an adjustable throttling range from 0.02 to 0.5" water and should be capable of being set to control static pressure as small as 0.01 " of water. 02036 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 2 05/15 C. These controllers shall have an adjustable span for setting to ideal curve for use in variable air volume systems. If controllers without adjustable span are used a square root extractor must be used to allow for ideal curve setting. ' 2.7 CONTROL VALVES, WATER A. All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. 9Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless -steel stems and spring -loaded teflon packing. C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. 2.8 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS A. The temperature control contractor will provide all control dampers of the types indicated on the plans. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades t must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 1 /2" shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -40 degrees to 200 degrees F. B. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and all two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. C. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall ,. submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control -submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. D. All controldampers shall be -standard products of - the temperature control manufacturer's factory. Local fabrication of dampers is not -allowed. 2.9 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS 04 :..A: Pneumatic operators shall be'sized to. operate their appropriate dampers or, valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified. B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. C. Where critical application controllers are used, or where actuators are controlled from. ' pressure sensors, pilot positioners shall be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION r A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the Ok contract price. 02036 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 3 05/15 3.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNITS A. These air units are single zone variable air volume air handling units with chilled water cooling coils, outside air dampers, return air dampers, and inlet vane control on the supply fans. B. Morning Warm -Up Cycle: During the morning warm-up operation, the air unit fans shall be on. The outside air dampers shall remain closed and the chilled water cooling coil valves shall remain closed. The static air pressure controller located 2/3 down the duct shall modulate the 4-20 mA signal to the VFD to maintain a constant static pressure. C. Normal Daytime Operation: The air handling unit fan shall be on. The outside air damper shall open to an adjustable minimum position. A flow control system shall maintain a constant static pressure in the supply duct and shall control the cooling coil discharge temperature to maximize energy efficiency of the system. A static pressure transmitter located approximately 2/3 of the way down each of the 2 trunk ducts of the air unit shall provide a signal to the flow control center which shall modulate the fan inlet vanes to maintain a constant static pressure. The static pressure transmitter shall be of the automatic reset type specified under "Critical Application Controllers." D. An automatic 2-way valve shall control the discharge temperature of the cooling coil at a constant 54 degrees as the air flow varies from 100% design flow down to 60% of designed maximum flow. As the air flow decreases from 60% to 40%, the discharge temperature shall be reset upward from 54 degrees to 58 degrees. The reset schedule shall be fully job adjustable from 25% to 100% air flow and 60 degrees to 50 degrees discharge air temperature. E. The outside air damper shall be interlocked with the' air handling unit fan in such a manner that it will not open unless the fan is running and will remain closed during the morning warm-up cycle. A pneumatic manual position switch shall be provided at each air handling unit such that outside air may be adjusted. F. A freeze protection thermostat shall be provided at the inlet of each cooling coil and upon activation shall shut down the air handling unit fan and close the minimum outside air damper. G. A high limit thermostat shall be located in the return and discharge duct to stop the fan above 136 degrees. H. Fire alarm contractor shall provide duct mounted smoke detectors for supply and return air ducts at the unit. Upon detection of .smoke, fire alarm shall sound and .unit shall stop. 3.3 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Provide pneumatic air to the smoke damper actuators. Provide P/E such that on a signal from the fire alarm system, smoke dampers shall close. 3.4 FAN TERMINAL UNITS WITH ZONE HEATING COILS A. These units have an integral fan and motor and primary air damper. The unit manufacturer will furnish normally open damper operators. This contractor shall provide a modulating two way valve in the coil outlet and a load analyzer to monitor a minimum of two points from the thermostats on each respective zone. The air temperature shall be reset to satisfy the space calling for the most heat. B. When the air handling unit fan starts, an air static switch furnished by the unit manufacturer starts the unit blower. C. If the discharge temperature is below the required setpoint, the primary air damper shall modulate toward the closed position. As the primary air quantity decreases, a proportionate amount is taken from the return air plenum to allow a constant volume of 02036 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 4 05/15 a�. air to be delivered by the unit. When the damper is fully closed and all air is being recirculated from the return plenum, the three way valve shall modulate open to the coil to offset the heat loss. D. If the discharge temperature rises above the required setpoint, the sequence is reversed. As the primary air damper opens to the design inlet CFM, the maximum inlet volume controller, furnished by the unit manufacturer, overrides the room thermostat. An E-P switch provided by the unit manufacturer shall close the primary damper when the fan is off. 3.5 COOLING TOWER A. Freeze Protection: Provide an electric immersion thermostat sensing sump temperature which on a drop in temperature to approximately 36 degrees F (adjustable) shall energize 4: d the auxiliary sump heater. 3.6 CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. Normal: The condenser water shall be controlled by a thermostat in the line from the tower. The temperature shall be controlled by sequencing the two speed tower fan to low speed, then off, then modulating the tower bypass valve, to dump to the sump of the tower. B. Wet Economizer: Provide a secondary thermostat to control the temperature in the winter to support the existing plate frame heat exchanger. 3.7 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints and setup amounts shall be such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the preventive maintenance procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under operating .conditions and is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the desired sequence. B. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the:Owner, factory representatives under direct employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturershall provide two six -hour periods of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. An additional six -hour instruction period shall_ be given at the beginning of the next heating or cooling season. C. Provide three sets of complete operating and maintenance instructions with drawings, typewritten instructions and operating sequences, and descriptive data sheets. Assemble each set in a hard cover binder with "Temperature Control" title placed on front cover and binding. 3.8 GUARANTEE A. All devices shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree F. System shall be guaranteed for one year after final acceptance. 02036 05/15 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 5 3.9 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM A. The existing system is a Johnson Metasys DDC control system. Expand and add points per the attached Point Chart. END OF SECTION 02036 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 6 05/15 _.._ .. r Eqz•... µ. F3 i„ ,m...:� .rs ,.. ... , IT bC POIN-r GHAT T POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICATION ■■■■■■■■■■■ Entering Air Temperature____ a■a■a■■a■■■a■■■■■a■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■a■a■ Ron ::Discharge Air Sensor Low -Manual ■aa■■aa■■■■■a■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■a■■a■loan iTemp.Cold Deck a■a■■a®a■a■■■■■a■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■a■■ RA Damper (Mix Box) ..OA, -aa■■a■■a■■■■■■■■■a■■■■■■■a■■■a■■■■■a■a■■■ VFD Common Alarm City of Lubbock Municipal Square Energy Management FFA 02036-1 Fanning and Associates, Inc. C o n s u l t i n g E n g i n e e r s 2555 74th Lubbock, Tx 79423 906 745-2533 SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE A. The work included in Division 16 of the Specifications includes all electrical work, interior and exterior to the project. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and supervision to install, test and make operational the complete electrical systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide and install products in accordance with referenced standards. Comply with the standards listed in each section. B. Codes: The electrical work shall be in accordance with latest edition of the following codes: 1. National Electrical Code 2. National Electrical Safety Code 3. Life Safety Code 4. Uniform Building Code 5. City of Lubbock Electrical Ordinance 6. State of Texas codes as applicable 7. National Fire Protection Association 8. Other codes as referenced in individual sections - C. Material Standards: Materials and equipment shall be listed or labeled as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner. Materials shall be marked for their intended use. D. Permits and Inspections: Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of the :. work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver all certificates of inspections issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for equipment as listed in each Section. B. Submittals shall include descriptive material, catalog sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance with drawings and specifications. C. Provide complete electrical characteristics for all equipment. Lighting submittals shall - include photometric data. D. Submittals shall be clearly marked showing the individual item offered E. All electrical submittals shall be bound in a book, indexed by specification section, and certified that they have been checked by the contractor. F. Omissions from the submittal of any material which has been shown on the drawings or specified, does not relieve the contractor from furnishing and installing the item. 02036 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1 """' 05/15 1.5 WARRANTY A. The contractor warrants the material and equipment installed to be free from defects for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner. All defects in labor or materials occurring during this period shall be repaired or replaced. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical equipment specified and shown on the drawings is based on information available at the time of design. If the equipment furnished has different electrical requirements, the contractor shall make the required changes to the wire, conduit, controls, overcurrent protection, switchgear, and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The cost for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this Specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be UL labeled where a Standard exists for the product. If the product does not bear the UL label, the manufacturer shall submit documentation from an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, showing evidence that the product is suitable for the installation. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products in current production of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. C. All materials shall be new and free from defects. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. All material and equipment shall be installed, applied, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and standards. E. Where no specific material is mentioned, provide the required material from a reputable manufacturer. The material shall conform to the project requirements, and shall be suitable to the engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabricate, erect, and install the complete electrical systems in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel who are licensed and experienced in such work. Proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. 3.2 DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully coordinate the work with structural, architectural, and mechanical conditions. Make adjustments to avoid conflicts. B. The locations shown for electrical equipment is approximate and not intended to convey the exact details of installation. Exact locations are to be determined in the field by actual measurements. 02036 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 2 05/15 C. The contractor is responsible for fitting the equipment and material into the space. If the equipment furnished requires different space conditions than shown on the drawings, the contractor shall arrange for such space and shall submit a drawing indicating the exact details of installation prior to construction. D. Do not scale drawings. Layout electrical equipment using dimensions obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment and from field measurements. 3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION A.' Prior to submitting bids, visit the site and become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Include in the bid the work required to remove, extend, relocate, reconnect or modify existing equipment or systems, and to restore them to their original condition. 3.4 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations. B. All materials, except those specifically designed to be installed outdoors, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry building or trailer. Protect all stored equipment from damage. Remove damaged materials from the premises. C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment and materials. They shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold and heat unless designed for such conditions. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Sleeve or cut all openings walls, floors, ceilings and roof required to install the electrical work. B. Do not cut structural members unless specific permission is granted by the structural engineer. C. Patch all openings after installation of the work, and repair any damage caused by this activity. Restore the surface to its original condition. 3.6 PAINTING A. Refer to PAINTING Section of these Specifications. B. Touchup scratched or marred surfaces of all electrical equipment with paint obtained from the equipment manufacturers specifically for that purpose. Remove all oil, dirt, grease and foreign material before painting and prepare the surface as. recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment, paint backboards with two coats of light gray semi -gloss paint. 3.7 TESTING A. Provide all field-testing specified in the individual specification sections. 3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide record documents as required in Division 1 of the specifications. N 02036 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 3 �°" 05/15 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals as required in Division 1 of the specifications. B. Before final inspection, instruct the owner's personnel in operation of the systems under this Division. Use the Operation and Maintenance Manual as basis for the instruction. Review the contents of the manual in detail and explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in the manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. END OF SECTION — SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS r PART 1 GENERAL �.. 1.1 NOTE p- A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. " 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all conduits and fittings. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all conduits, wireways, raceways, and fittings for all systems interior and exterior to the building. m-� 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE l i' A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. ` f 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C-80.1 Rigid Galvanized Conduit C-80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit a UL 651 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 360 Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) RN1 Externally PVC Coated GRS and IMC Conduit PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Metal Conduit and Fittings: a. Allied �* b. Wheatland c. Appleton d. Raco e. Killark f. O-Z / Gedney 02036 RACEWAYS 16110 - 1 "°" 05/15 2. PVC Conduit and Fittings: a. Carlon b. Certainteed 3. PVC Coated Metal Conduit: a. Robroy Industries b. Levy 4. Support Channel: a. Unistrut b. Kindorf 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) : 1. Rigid, threaded, galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel, galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) : 1. Steel tubing, galvanized outside with slick corrosion resistant interior coating. 2. Steel set -screw couplings and connectors in dry locations; steel compression couplings and connectors in wet locations. D. Flexible Metal Conduit : 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Flexible conduit shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Connectors shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips with PVC cover extruded over the exterior to make the conduit Liquidtight. 2. Shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity, liquidtight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the ^ building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12"_ long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement 02036 RACEWAYS 16110 - 2 05115 because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet !�*+ locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1 " from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after �-s threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, 9 - 9 switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. G. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push PM pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors 4 ; into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways - before pulling in conductors. H. Pull Lines: Install pull line in each empty conduit, including the conduits installed for telephone and computer data systems. r I. Penetrations: 1. Exterior Walls: a. Conduit penetrations in exterior walls shall be made with "Link -Seal" as manufactured by Thunderline Corp. Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening. Links shall be loosely �e assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide an absolutely watertight seal between the pipe and wall opening. The seal shall be constructed so as to provide electrical insulation between the pipe and wall, thus reducing chances of cathodic reaction between these two members. b. Contractor shall determine the required inside diameter of each individual wall opening or sleeve before ordering, fabricating or installing. The inside diameter of each wall opening shall be sized as manufactured to fit the pipe and Link - Seal to assure a watertight joint. If pipe O.D. is non-standard due to coating, insulation, etc. make adjustments before proceeding with wall opening detail. 2. Fire Wall and Smoke Partitions: Penetrate fire walls through sleeves. Seal the .� opening between the conduit and sleeve with UL rated fire foam sealant to maintain the fire rating of the wall. 3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1 /4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-114" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where 02036 RACEWAYS 16110 - 3 '" 05/15 conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. E. Dry -Wall Partitions: Conduits installed in dry -wall partitions shall be firmly secured to the studs. Where conduits rise vertically in the wall, secure at locations near the top and bottom of the run and at intermediate points as necessary to comply with NEC requirements. Support multiple conduits from metal studs using pre -assembled bar hanger assembly consisting of support bar, retaining clips and conduit straps. — 3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. Building raceways and junction boxes shall be identified as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect raceways as recommended by the manufacturer to insure coatings, finishes, etc. are not damaged. Repair or replace damaged raceways. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean all installed materials of foreign paint, dirt and construction debris. END OF SECTION 02036 RACEWAYS 161 10 - 4 05/15 4 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets on all conductors and cables and wire. 1.3 SCOPE A. Under this Section, furnish and install all building wires and cables (600 volts and below) complete with connectors and terminations. Exterior branch circuits and feeders are also included in this section. Wiring for communication and alarm systems are included in their respective sections unless they reference this Section. y 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products which comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. - - 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) R ; UL 44 Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables .�+ UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs UL 510 Insulating Tape PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. w 1. Insulated Cable: a. Southwire Co. 1p" b. Senator Wire & Cable Co. c. Okonite d. Anaconda e. Pirelli Cable Co. 2. Electrical Spring Connectors: a. Scotch b. Ideal C. Buchanan ,.. 3. Compression Connectors: a. Burndy 02036 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 1 h 05/15 b. Scotch c. Ilsco 4. Mechanical Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch c. Ideal 5. Insulating Kits: a. Raychem b. Scotch 6. Insulating Tape: a. Scotch 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Type: Soft drawn copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, free from flaws and imperfections. Conductors no. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Conductors larger than no. 10 shall be stranded. B. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, otherwise specified in other Sections, or otherwise required by the National Electrical Code, conductors shall have type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. C. High Temperatures: Use type RHH or RHW-2 for wiring in proximity to boilers and other devices subject to high temperatures. D. Markings: Conductors shall be marked on the surface with rated voltage, size, type, and manufacturer. The size shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 24 inches, with the remaining data repeated at intervals not exceeding 40 inches. E. Performance: Conductors shalt be electrically continuous and free from shorts or grounds. All open or shorted conductors shall be replaced. All conductors with damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced with new conductors free from defects. F. Conductors and cables installed open in ceiling plenums shall be plenum -rated. 2.3 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Solid Conductors (No. 10 AWG and smaller): U.L. approved, screw -on, electrical spring connectors, 600 volt, 105C, insulated. B. Stranded Conductors (No. 8 and Larger): Crimp type compression connectors properly selected for the conductor size and material. All connectors shall be applied with _ properly sized dies and tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulate the splice with an insulating kit providing 600 volt, 90C rating. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. Grounding conductors from isolated grounding system shall be green with yellow stripes. 2. Equipment grounding conductors, no. 6 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Sizes larger than no. 6 awg shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of green tape, or green adhesive labels. B. Neutral Conductors: 1. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray. 2. Sizes no. 6 awg, or smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at 02036 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 2 05115 every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of white tape or stripped tape or white adhesive labels. r C. Phase Conductors: 1. Conductors no. 10 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each �+ end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of colored tape, or colored adhesive labels. 2. The color -coding system employed shall be permanently posted on the inside door of each branch -circuit panelboard. The posting shall identify the color -coding of each phase conductor and shall be applied to the inside of the door with adhesive. 3. 120/208 volt, 3 phase system: a. Phase A — Black b. Phase B —Red C. Phase C — Blue PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING: Install all wiring in raceways unless specified otherwise. r A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Use U.L. listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Wire Sizing: 1. No wire shall be smaller than no. 12, except for signal and control circuits, or lighting fixture taps. 2. Receptacle and motor branch circuits — Use no. 12 conductors unless noted or •■+ scheduled otherwise. 3. 120 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuits — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 4. 277 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuit — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 175 feet, use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 5. Where more than three current -carrying conductors are installed in the same conduit or raceway, the conductors shall be increased in size as required to maintain the required ampacity after application of the adjustment factors of NEC Table 310-15(b)(2)(a). 6. All branch circuit wiring connected to the load side of dimmers shall have an individual neutral installed with each circuit. D. Joints and Splices: 1. Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures permitted by the NEC. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. 2. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, switchboards, motor control centers or motor control enclosures. 3. Conductors for use with insulated spring connectors shall be twisted together prior to application of the connector. 02036 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 3 �` 05/15 E. Terminations: Tighten electrical connections and terminations in accordance with the manufacturer's published values. A calibrated tool shall be used to insure proper torque values. F. Bundling: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pullboxes and the like using nylon straps made for this purpose. Bundle conductors larger than no. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. G. Identification: Refer to ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION. 1. Mark conductors to clearly identify each circuit by number. Securely attach to each conductor in each junction box, pull box, panelboard, etc. _ 2. The cover of each junction box and pullbox shall be marked with the designations of each circuit contained therein. 3. Where colored plastic tape is applied to conductors for identification, use half - lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from the terminal points and in boxes where taps and splices are made. Apply the last two turns with no tension to prevent unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape applied to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. , 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Tests and procedures shall be accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing. Submit test data to the engineer on data sheets in a format that can be compared with future testing. All test data shall be included in the project operating manual. 1. Test wires and cables for electrical continuity and short circuits. 2. Prior to terminating, check each feeder conductor with megohmmeter to determine the insulation resistance with respect to ground and other phases. Applied _ potential shall be 1000 volts do for 1 minute. 3. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturer's recommended values using calibrated torque wrench. 4. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION 02036 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 4 05/15 G` .. - -SECTION 16130 BOXES r, PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. + 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets for all boxes. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install electrical boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. ' These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) No. 514 Outlet boxes and fittings No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports No. FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. Sheet Steel Outlet and Device Boxes: r� a. Raco b. Steel City c. Appleton 2. Cast Metal Device Boxes: a. Crouse Hinds b. Appleton c. Pyle National 2.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. All boxes shall be UL listed. 02036 BOXES 16130 - 1 "'" 05/15 B. Sheet steel boxes shall be not lighter than 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication. C. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron or cast alloy. D. Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and communications use shall be 4" square with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. Box depth shall be as required by NEC for device and wiring volume requirements, but not smaller than 1-1/2 inches. E. Boxes for devices mounted flush in concrete block walls shall be single gang masonry boxes, 3-1 /2" deep. F. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be concrete -tight type. G. Boxes for surface mounted or pendant fixtures shall be 4"octagonal by 1-1 /2" minimum depth. H. Boxes for flush mounted fixtures shall be 4" by 4" size with cover installed above the ceiling and accessible by removing ceiling panel or fixture. Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit. 1. Boxes for interior exposed work shall be cast metal boxes (Cast iron or cast alloy). J. Boxes for outdoors shall be cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2.3 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel galvanized inside and outside , with galvanized covers. B. Dimensions shall be as required by NEC for the number, size and locations of conduits entering the box. C. Boxes installed above ceilings shall be accessible by removing ceiling panels, installing access door in hard ceiling, or flush mounting the cover on the ceiling. D. Boxes installed flush in walls in finished areas shall have overlapping trim with hinged door and lock to match the appearance of electrical panelboard. E. All boxes shall have covers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. All pull and junction boxes shall be accessible after construction is complete. Install access panels in the construction as required to make the box accessible. C. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. D. Where outlet box on grid ceiling supports surface or suspended fixture, provide box with fixture stud and secure the box to ceiling members with steel channel. E. Outlet boxes for devices shown back to back shall be offset a minimum of 6 inches. F. All boxes shall have covers and unused conduit openings shall be covered. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Circuit numbers shall be marked on junction box covers as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. B. Color code junction boxes as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. END OF SECTION 02036 BOXES 16130 - 2 05/15 t. SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES �*+ PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all wiring devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated complete with coverplates. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. �., 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) F ° No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6 Wiring Devices — Dimensional requirements 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 20 General -Use Snap Switches PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: F 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton �... 3. Pass & Seymour i 4. General Electric 5. Bryant g 2.2 CLASSIFICATION A. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. B. All wiring devices shall be specification grade. a° 02036 WIRING DEVICES 1.6140 — 1 05115 2.3 COLORS A. All devices shall have white finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.4 SWITCHES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish switches in colors specified above even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Single pole wall switch — 1221. 2. Three-way wall switch — 1223. 3. Four-way wall switch — 1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch — 1221-PLC. 5. Momentary contact switch — 1556. 2.5 RECEPTACLES, A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. .Furnish receptacles in colors specified even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Duplex receptacle: 20 amp, 125 volt, grounding (NEMA 5-20R) — No. 5362. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle (GFI) — No. GF-5362. 3. Special Receptacles: Furnish devices in the NEMA configuration listed on the drawings. 2.6 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Provide the specified device in weatherproof cast box with gasketed coverplate. 2.7 COVERPLATES A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, including telephone, signal outlets and other devices. Coverplates shall be one piece single or multi -gang type as required. 1. Indoor Flush Devices: a. High abuse nylon plates matching the color of the device covered. 2. Indoor Surface Devices: For indoor devices use zinc -coated metal with rounded or beveled edges, same size as the box. 3. Outdoor devices: TayMac PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices plumb and level. B. Install SPST wall switches with OFF position down. C. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Install devices within outlet boxes to allow coverplates to be in full contact with the wall on all sides. F. Replace broken devices and plates with new. G. Clean all paint, plaster and dirt from wiring devices and plates. 02036 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 05/ 15 r* 'u 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Devices noted to be installed above counters or millwork shall be installed above the backsplash. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by architect, install devices at the following heights above finished floor: DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall switch 48" Receptacle 18" Wall dimmer switch 48" Clock hanger outlet 12" below ceiling sa. Wall mounted clock 12" below ceiling Telephone outlet 18" 3.3 IDENTIFICATION -- A. At each wiring device mark the inside of the coverplate with the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. Use black indelible marker. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Energize lighting circuits and operate each wall switch to verify proper operation. B. Energize receptacle circuits and test each receptacle with circuit tester to verify the -° device is energized and has correct polarity. C. Test TRIP and RESET buttons on GFI receptacles. In addition, test GFI receptacles with a GFI tester to verify it trips at 4ma of ground current. �* END OF SECTION A 02036 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 05/15 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE . . A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all grounding equipment. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install grounding equipment and systems as specified herein. Also refer to, and comply with specific grounding requirements contained in other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System a 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies �+ are acceptable: 1. Grounding Products: a. Chance / Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp C. Erico Inc. d. Ideal Industries, Inc e. ILSCO f. Kearney / Cooper Power Systems g. Lyncoln XIT Grounding h. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. +� i. Thomas and Betts j. Raco, Inc. k. Burndy 02036 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 1 ""' 05/15 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Use insulated conductors that comply with WIRES AND CABLES Section. 2. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 3. Isolated ground conductors shall be green with yellow stripes. 4. No. 6 AWG and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of conductor. Larger sizes shall be identified with color -coded plastic tape at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. For equipment grounding conductors use green tape. For isolated ground conductors use alternating bands of green and yellow tape with a minimum . of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. B. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Insulated stranded cable complying with WIRES AND CABLES Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. B. Install a separate, green -insulated, equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and each branch conduit. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with related phase and neutral conductors, and connect to pull boxes or outlet boxes at _ intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect the grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and ground busses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. C. Install equipment grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Install equipment grounding conductors in all flexible metal conduit and liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 3.2 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection: Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. END OF SECTION 02036 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 2 05/15 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL i' 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide and install electrical identification for electrical conductors and equipment. rW 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Comply with UL Standard 969. C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NEMA WC-1 and WC-2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. W. H. Brady 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Nameplate Co. 4. Panduit Corp. 2.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: 1. Melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1 /16" thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches, and 1 /8" thick for larger sizes. 2. White letters on black face for equipment connected to normal power system. ., 3. White letters on red face for equipment connected to emergency power system. 4. Attach with self -tapping stainless -steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive can be used where screws can not or should not penetrate the surface. 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. B. Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self- adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters to show circuit . identification. �3 02036 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 05/15 2.4 UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indication type of underground line. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and OSHA. B. For items attached with adhesive, degrease and clean the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where items attach to surfaces that require painting, attach after completion of painting. D. Install signs at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. E. Identification on Raceways and Boxes: 1. Every box containing circuit wiring shall have the circuit numbers marked on the outside cover of the junction box. Use indelible marker with wide tip. Markings for normal circuits shall be black, and shall be red for emergency circuits. 3.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Apply conductor identification on each conductor in each box, enclosure, cabinet and panel. B. Refer to Section 16120 for color -coding of conductors. 3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved, plastic laminate sign on each unit of electrical equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems unless the units contain their own self-explanatory identification. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with '/z" high lettering on 1- 1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required). C. Text shall match the notations used on the drawings for identification. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, AND SWITCHGEAR A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign containing 3 lines of text. The top line shall be the panel name. The center line shall indicate the panel voltage, and the bottom line shall indicate the source of supply. B. Signs for equipment fed from the normal system shall have white letters on black background, and equipment fed from the emergency system shall have white letters on red background. 02036 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2 05/15 C. An example of the required identifications is: Panel 4HA 277/480 Fed From Panel 4DP END OF SECTION .7 r - [Am wew 02036 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-3 05/15 SECTION 16441 - SAFETY SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal size. 5. Fuse rating and type. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all safety switches shown on the drawings or required by codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Enclosures for electrical Equipment UL 98 Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens SAFETY SWITCHES 02036 05/15 16441 1 2.2 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. D. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. E. Where safety switches serve as motor or motor starter disconnects, provide horsepowerrated switches with auxiliary contacts to disconnect all power and control circuits. F. Construction: 1. Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick -make / quick - break type. - 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. Switches shall have CU/AL mechanical lugs. G. Enclosures: 1. Where installed indoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA I, general purpose type unless otherwise noted. 2. Where installed outdoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 3R, raintight type unless ` otherwise noted. 3. Where noted on the drawings, provide the following enclosures: a. NEMA 4 — watertight (304 stainless steel). b. NEMA 12 — dust tight/oil tight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and NEC requirements. B. Install adjacent disconnects at the same height. C. Install disconnects to maintain the required NEC clearances and working space. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install engraved plastic sign on each safety switch as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall identify the load served. The center line shall indicate the voltage. The third line shall indicate the source of supply. 02036 SAFETY SWITCHES 16441 -2 05/15 i D. An example of the required identification is: AHU #2 480 V Fed From Panel PP 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .� A. Inspection: k , 1. Visually inspect each switch for proper grounding connections as specified under _ GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Verify fusible switches contain proper type and size of fuses. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each switch ON and OFF four times to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuit and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION rr P pL� 02036 SAFETY SWITCHES 16441 -3 '""� 05/15 SECTION 16470 g..3 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, -. General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. .: 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal sizes. 5. Catalog product sheets. µ 6. Nameplate Identification. „., 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all electrical panelboards shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panels shall be complete assemblies including enclosures, bussing, overcurrent protective devices, and trim. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE . y A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded Case Breakers /Enclosures 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB-1 Panelboards "No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS F, A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1 Square D L 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 02036 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 !'"* 05/15 2.2 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Panels shall be arranged for flush mounting, surface mounting, or free-standing as indicated on the drawings. C. Panels shall have the voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, and interrupting ratings as scheduled on the drawings. D. All panelboard accessories and features scheduled or specified on the drawings shall be provided. E. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where the device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of - device scheduled. Where the device is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. F. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic indicating type unless otherwise noted. G. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. H. Connect all overcurrent protective devices with sequence phasing. I. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a plastic covered cardholder on the inside of the panelboard door. J. Install laminated plastic nameplate for each panel as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Rigidly constructed of galvanized sheet steel per UL 50 Standards. Corners shall be overlapped or welded with the edges turned over to receive trim. 2. Where two -section panels are required, both sections shall be same height, and have fully rated bussing in separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. B. Trim: 1. Fabricated from sheet steel meeting the requirements of UL 50 Standards. Trim shall have medium gray enamel finish suitable to serve as the final finish, or suitable to receive field painting. 2. Trim door shall have rounded corners and edges free from burrs. 3. Surface trims shall be the same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box %" on all sides. 4. Furnish each door with substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. Doors more than 48" high shall have auxiliary fasteners. Provide each lock with 2 keys. All locks shall be keyed alike. 5. Unless noted otherwise, interior mounted panels shall have type 1 fronts (one piece with hinged door). Where door -in -door construction is specified, it shall consist of a hinged door within a piano -hinged cover secured with trim clamps. 6. Exterior mounted panels shall be type 313 in accordance with UL 50 requirements. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two additional trunk type latches. C. Bussing: 1. All bussing shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit temperature rise on any current -carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. 2. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate the conductors to be terminated. Provide 02036 PANELBOARDS 16470 2 05/15 oversized lugs to terminate conductors that are increased in size due to voltage drop or temperature requirements. 3. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. Where scheduled, an isolated ground bus shall also be included. 4. A full size (100%) neutral bar shall be furnished for panels shown with neutral. Neutrals shall have suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring neutral connection. Where scheduled, provide 200% rated neutrals with lugs for oversized neutral conductors. 2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELS CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE A. Distribution panels with bolt -on devices contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings to interrupt fault current values indicated on the drawings. Breakers shall be molded case type. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide overcurrent and short circuit protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Also provide ground fault protection where scheduled. C. Circuit breakers shall operate by toggle -type handle and shall be quick make, quick - break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip -free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. 2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELS A. Bolt -in type, heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, single- and multi -pole molded case circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. B. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common handle for all multiple pole e breakers. C. Breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits. D. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights and fire alarm panels. E. Breakers shall be fully rated to interrupt the fault current values scheduled on the drawings. F. Provide breaker accessories as scheduled on the drawings. G. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes with each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEMA j 4 P131.1 and NEC standards. B. Panelboard enclosures shall be securely fastened to the structure with a minimum of four bolts or screws. C. Clean dirt and foreign paint from exterior and interior of all panels. D. Do not splice conductors in panels. E. Conductors not terminating in panelboard shall not extend through or enter panel enclosure. F. A single conductor shall terminate in each lug on a circuit breaker. Do not terminate multiple conductors under a single lug. 02036 PANELBOARDS 16470-3 05/15 G. During installation carefully balance the electrical loads between the various phases. This may require connecting loads to circuits different from the circuit numbers indicated on the drawings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in panelboards as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install panelboard nameplate identification as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. Provide individual circuit identification for each circuit with a type -written directory of circuits mounted in a holder on the inside of the panel door. The directory shall identify the type or name of the load served along with the room names and numbers. The room names and numbers shall be the final names and numbers assigned to the space and not those used on the drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each panel for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually inspect breakers and switches for broken parts and loose terminals.. 3. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 4. Visually verify panelboard trim fits properly with no gaps between the trim and panel enclosure. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each breaker ON and OFF to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. 4. When the facility is under normal use, amperage measurements shall be taken on each phase conductor in each panel feeder, and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%). END OF SECTION 02036 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 4 05/15 ) SECTION 16510 LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE r k „ A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, R General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all lighting products. B. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and t incidental to the complete interior and exterior lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 101 Life Safety Code '^ 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) z C82.1 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts C82.4 HID Lamp Ballasts 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LE 4 1Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 542 Lampholders, Starters for Fluorescent Lamps UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1029 HID Lamp Ballasts UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures �* UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1572 HID Lighting Fixtures PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS eye „ A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Ballasts: a. Advance b. Lutron c. General Electric a d. Valmont 02036 LIGHTING 16510 - 1 `' 05/15 2. Lamps: a. Osram/Sylvania b. General Electric c. Philips 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations scheduled on the drawings. Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes of suffixes corresponding to the feature called for. " 2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fixtures shall bear UL label. B. Lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic with nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. 2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Use ballasts from manufacturers listed above. Generic ballasts from other manufacturers are not acceptable. 1. General Requirements: a. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated for full light output. b. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10%. c. Sound Rating: A d. Power Factor: 95% minimum 2. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: a. CBM labeled b. Encapsulated c. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail 2.5 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamps 1. Color Temperature: 3500 K 2. CRI: 86 or higher 3. Lamp types as scheduled on the drawings. B. HID Lamps: 1. Metal Halide Color Temperature: 3600 K 2. CRI: 70 or higher 3. Phosphor coated unless otherwise specified. 4. All metal halide lamps used in open fixtures where people may be exposed to ultraviolet radiation shall be the type that will automatically extinguish when the outer envelope is broken. This feature shall be provided regardless of the lamp code listed in the fixture schedule. 5. Provide HID lamps with correct burning position selected for the fixture orientation and mounting. 02036 LIGHTING 16510 - 2 05/15 PART 3 EXECUTION .a* 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture .M recessed in a plaster ceiling. K ' D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION t-, A� e� Y 02036 LIGHTING 16510 - 3 *"+ 05/15 SECTION 16610 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM a; PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The installing contractor and/or equipment manufacturer shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 1. Point to point wiring diagram showing terminal connections to all system devices. This would include the size of conductors to each device and proposed routing. After review, this shall become the installation drawing. 2. Riser wiring diagram and conduit sizes. 3. Floor plan drawings locating all devices associated with the Fire Alarm System. 4. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment to be used and so marked as to dimensions, size, voltage, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and configuration. 5. Detailed system description and operation describing system functions. 6. Complete Bill of Material for reference. B. All submittal data shall be in bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, and state fire alarm license number adequately identified. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the fire alarm manufacturer to sell, install and service the manufacturer's equipment. B. The installing contractor must be licensed by the state Fire Marshall to sell, install and service fire alarm systems. C. The installing contractor shall have on their staff an installation superintendent who is licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation shall take place, as required by the Texas Insurance Code. D. The fire alarm installation firm will have factory -trained personnel performing the control panel wiring for the system that they were trained for. The firm shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. E. The qualifications of the installation firm, the availability of replacement parts and service records will be considered. 1.4 CLOSE-OUT MANUALS Y A. Provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals which includes:. - 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 3. A plan showing conduit size, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. 02036 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16610 - 1 05/15 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The installation and testing shall be made under the provisions of the latest National — Electrical Code (NFPA-70); NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code). NFPA 71, NFPA 72, UL Standards (1480, 864, 268, 268A, 217, 521, 228, 464, 1638, 38, 346, 1481), and all other applicable state and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall submit the new fire alarm equipment layout to the local fire alarm authority having jurisdiction for approval. 1.6 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall modify the existing 24 VDC, fire detection and alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. It is the intent to obtain a complete -` system which shall operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control panels, power supplies, alarm -initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. The system shall operate as a continuous sounding system which shall have multiple audible alarm circuits. The system notification appliance circuits shall be wired as Style Y (Class B) supervised circuits and the initiating circuits shall match existing style. 1.7 QUALITY A. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be of the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or, if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. B. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, unless directed otherwise. C. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code, local codes and the National Fire Protection Association-70, Article 760. The minimum wire sizes shall be 12 gauge for AC power supply connections and auxiliary circuits, 14 gauge for DC power supply connections, 16 gauge for audible alarm circuits. D. Wire shall be UL listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit. All wiring between floors, in mechanical rooms, or in risers shall be installed in conduit with a minimum size of 3/4". 1.8 TESTING, GUARANTEE, SERVICE A. A factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall perform the final connections, complete system checkout and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance and approval of the engineer and local authorities. Upon completion and acceptance, the owner and/or his representative(s) shall be instructed in the proper use of the system. A written copy of the final system test and checkout shall be provided detailing the function of each device. Furnish the Owner, Architect, Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction a Certificate of Compliance. B. All equipment and wiring shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from owner acceptance or beneficial occupancy, whichever comes first. Any equipment shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. C. The manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of such supplied to the Owner and Engineer. D. The manufacturer's representative shall be prepared to offer a service contract at the end of the warranty period. 02036 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16610 - 2 05/15 -, Po, s� 1.9 COORDINATION e. A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive of: electrical contractor, HVAC contractor, and HVAC controls contractor. r- Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional system. PART 2 PRODUCTS I^ 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM ,WOO A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be a single integrated system . by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire detection portion of the system shall consist of the existing fire alarm panel and shall contain all additional power supplies, relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION A. Operation of manual or automatic initiating device shall cause the following events to occur: 1. The System alarm LED shall flash. 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 3. The display and remote annunciators shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the alarm and its location. 4. All automatic programs assigned to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated indicating devices and relays activated, such as: a. The appropriate indication shall appear on the fire control panel. b. An evacuation tone shall sound on all alarm horns and all visual strobes and exit signs shall flash. c. Remote Point Annunciation devices shall show an alarm condition if devices connected to it are in alarm condition. a, d. All smoke dampers shall close and associated mechanical equipment shall stop. 2.3 CONTROL PANEL A. The control panel is existing and shall be reused. 2.4 INDICATING DEVICES A. The alarm indicating devices shall be UL listed or strobe/horn strobe and finished in red. Strobe shall be Wheelock RSS-24MCW-FR or equal. Horn/strobe shall be Wheelock NS- 24MCW-FR or equal. 2.5 INDICATING DEVICES A. The photoelectric smoke detectors or duct detectors shall be UL listed. Smoke detectors shall be Notifier SDX551 with base or equal and duct detectors shall be a Notifier DHX501 with remote annunciator and test switch or equal. B. Pull station shall match existing. 02036 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16610 - 3 05/15 PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the system shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of a representative ofthe manufacturer who shall make the final connection to the system, perform the functional tests of the system and place it in operation. B. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult manufacturer for all wiring diagrams, schematics, sizes, outlets, etc. before installing conduits and pulling wires. C. Fire alarm devices shall be mounted upon and all splices made in Listed Boxes. Wiring splices are to be avoided to .the extent possible and Transposing .or changing colors will not be permitted". D. Fire Alarm Remote Power Supply shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM E. As indicated on the drawings, each zone shall be labeled on the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Names of the zones shall be coordinated with the Owner, and shall meet with the Owner's approval. 3.2 FINAL INSPECTION A. After the system has been placed in service and all items are functioning properly, call for a final inspection. The manufacturer's representative shall be present and shall demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 INSTRUCTION A. The representative of the manufacturer shall allot one (1) hour to instruct the Owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the system. END OF SECTION 02036 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16610 - 4 05/15